1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
73 \default_output_format pdf2
75 \bibtex_command bibtex
76 \index_command default
80 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
81 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
85 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
86 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
87 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
92 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
93 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
96 \use_package amsmath 1
97 \use_package amssymb 1
100 \use_package mathdots 1
101 \use_package mathtools 0
102 \use_package mhchem 1
103 \use_package stackrel 0
104 \use_package stmaryrd 0
105 \use_package undertilde 0
107 \cite_engine_type default
111 \paperorientation portrait
115 \notefontcolor #0000ff
132 \paragraph_separation skip
134 \quotes_language english
137 \paperpagestyle default
138 \tracking_changes true
139 \output_changes false
143 \author 274215730 "scott"
144 \author 424524441 "rgheck"
145 \author 2047637253 "Guillaume Munch"
156 by the \SpecialChar LyX
161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
163 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
164 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
165 Documentation mailing list:
166 \begin_inset CommandInset href
168 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
179 \begin_inset Newline newline
183 \begin_inset Newline newline
187 \begin_inset Note Note
190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
191 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
192 \begin_inset Newline newline
197 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
198 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
206 \begin_layout Standard
207 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
208 LatexCommand tableofcontents
215 \begin_layout Chapter
219 \begin_layout Section
220 What is \SpecialChar LyX
224 \begin_layout Standard
226 is a document preparation system.
227 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
228 scripts, publishable books, business
229 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
230 It is unlike most other
231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
238 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
240 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
256 pt type, left justified, 5
257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
266 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
270 \begin_layout Standard
271 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
276 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
280 \begin_layout Standard
285 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
286 's philosophy: most importantly,
287 the format of all of the manuals.
288 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
289 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
295 manual describes that, too.
298 \begin_layout Section
303 \begin_layout Standard
304 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
305 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
307 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
308 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
312 \begin_layout Standard
313 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
314 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
315 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
317 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
318 only a vertical scrollbar.
319 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
320 The first case is large images.
321 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
322 image and use the option
333 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
336 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
337 this doesn't work for equations yet.
340 \begin_layout Standard
341 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
342 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
350 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
357 \begin_layout Section
361 \begin_layout Standard
362 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
364 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
366 Just select the manual you want to read from the
373 \begin_layout Section
374 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
376 \begin_inset CommandInset label
378 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
385 \begin_layout Standard
386 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
387 can be configured via the menu
389 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
393 \begin_inset Index idx
396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
403 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
405 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
406 packages are available.
407 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
409 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
411 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
412 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
416 \begin_inset space \space{}
419 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
420 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
422 To force \SpecialChar LyX
423 to re-inspect your system, you should use
425 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
429 \begin_inset Index idx
432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
433 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
439 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
440 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
443 \begin_layout Section
446 \begin_inset CommandInset label
448 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
455 \begin_layout Standard
456 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
457 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
458 installed, but you will not be
459 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
460 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
461 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
462 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
463 document can always be output as plain text
467 \begin_layout Standard
468 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
469 or DocBook classes or packages.
470 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
471 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
474 \begin_layout Standard
475 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
476 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
477 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
480 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
488 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
489 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
492 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
496 \begin_inset Index idx
499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
500 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
508 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
515 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
519 \begin_layout Chapter
520 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
524 \begin_layout Section
525 Basic File Operations
526 \begin_inset Index idx
529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
538 \begin_layout Standard
543 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
544 in addition to some more advanced operations:
547 \begin_layout Itemize
569 \begin_layout Itemize
585 arg "buffer-new-template"
591 \begin_layout Itemize
613 \begin_layout Itemize
623 \begin_layout Itemize
637 \begin_layout Itemize
659 \begin_layout Itemize
671 arg "buffer-write-as"
677 \begin_layout Itemize
691 \begin_layout Itemize
705 \begin_layout Standard
706 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
707 a few minor differences.
710 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
721 command lists the available templates.
722 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
723 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
724 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
732 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
739 \begin_layout Standard
740 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
772 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
773 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
774 is just that — a big, blank space.
782 \begin_layout Standard
803 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
808 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
811 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
829 will reload the document from disk.
830 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
831 and want to restore it to the last save.
840 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
841 them as your changes.
844 \begin_layout Section
845 Basic Editing Features
846 \begin_inset Index idx
849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
856 \begin_inset CommandInset label
858 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
865 \begin_layout Standard
866 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
867 can perform cut and paste operations
868 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
869 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
870 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
871 editing features and how to access
873 We will start with cut and paste.
876 \begin_layout Standard
877 As you might expect, the
881 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
882 various other editing features.
883 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
887 \begin_layout Itemize
893 \begin_inset Index idx
896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
925 \begin_layout Itemize
931 \begin_inset Index idx
934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
963 \begin_layout Itemize
969 \begin_inset Index idx
972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
997 \begin_layout Itemize
1001 \begin_inset space ~
1007 \begin_layout Itemize
1011 \begin_inset space ~
1017 \begin_layout Itemize
1021 \begin_inset space ~
1025 \begin_inset space ~
1031 \begin_inset Index idx
1034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1043 \begin_inset Index idx
1046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1061 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1071 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1077 \begin_layout Standard
1078 The first three are self-explanatory.
1079 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1080 and other programs by
1101 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1102 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1107 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1108 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1109 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1110 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1111 into individual cells.
1115 \begin_inset space ~
1120 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1121 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1125 \begin_layout Standard
1129 \begin_inset space ~
1134 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1136 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1138 \begin_inset space ~
1145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1151 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1152 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1153 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1155 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1159 \begin_inset space \space{}
1162 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1163 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1166 \begin_inset space ~
1169 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1171 \begin_inset space ~
1175 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1179 \begin_inset space ~
1188 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1189 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1191 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1195 \begin_inset space ~
1200 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1201 start a new paragraph.
1202 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1203 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1208 \begin_inset space ~
1211 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1213 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1217 \begin_inset space ~
1225 \begin_inset space ~
1228 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1231 paste from the primary selection.
1232 This is normally the currently selected text.
1235 \begin_layout Standard
1238 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1240 \begin_inset space ~
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1256 \begin_inset space ~
1262 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1268 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1271 \begin_inset space ~
1280 \begin_inset space ~
1285 button to skip the current word.
1289 \begin_inset space ~
1294 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1298 \begin_inset space ~
1303 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1305 If the toggle is set, searching for
1306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1317 will not match the word
1318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1332 Match whole words only
1334 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1335 to only find complete words, e.
1336 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1365 offers also an advanced
1368 \begin_inset space ~
1372 \begin_inset space ~
1377 feature that is described in section
1378 \begin_inset space ~
1382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1384 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1391 \begin_layout Standard
1392 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1393 \begin_inset space \space{}
1397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1405 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1407 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1412 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1419 \begin_layout Standard
1423 arg "inset-select-all"
1426 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1427 When the cursor is inside an inset
1430 arg "inset-select-all"
1433 selects the content of the inset.
1437 arg "inset-select-all"
1440 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1445 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1448 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1452 \begin_layout Section
1454 \begin_inset Index idx
1457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1464 \begin_inset Index idx
1467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1476 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1483 \begin_layout Standard
1484 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1486 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1489 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1492 or the toolbar button
1498 to undo some mistake.
1499 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1501 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1504 or the toolbar button
1511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1518 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1519 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1522 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1525 \begin_layout Standard
1526 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1535 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1536 This is a consequence of the 100
1537 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1540 step undo limit mentioned above.
1543 \begin_layout Standard
1552 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1554 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1558 \begin_layout Section
1560 \begin_inset Index idx
1563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1572 \begin_layout Standard
1573 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1576 \begin_layout Enumerate
1581 \begin_layout Itemize
1586 once anywhere in the edit window.
1587 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1591 \begin_layout Enumerate
1596 \begin_layout Itemize
1603 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1606 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1609 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1610 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1613 \begin_layout Itemize
1614 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1617 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1624 \begin_layout Enumerate
1625 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1629 \begin_layout Standard
1630 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1631 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1635 \begin_layout Section
1637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1639 name "sec:Navigating"
1644 \begin_inset Index idx
1647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1656 \begin_layout Standard
1658 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1661 \begin_layout Itemize
1666 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1667 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1670 \begin_layout Itemize
1671 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1673 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1675 \begin_inset space ~
1680 or by the toolbar button
1683 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1689 \begin_layout Itemize
1690 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1692 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1695 and use the same menu to return to them.
1696 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1699 \begin_layout Standard
1703 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1708 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1709 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1711 \begin_inset space ~
1716 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1717 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1718 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1719 your last editing position.
1722 \begin_layout Standard
1727 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1731 \begin_layout Subsection
1733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1735 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1740 \begin_inset Index idx
1743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1744 Navigating ! Outline
1750 \begin_inset Index idx
1753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1762 \begin_layout Standard
1763 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1764 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1765 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1767 \begin_inset space ~
1771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1773 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1777 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1778 \begin_inset space ~
1782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1784 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1789 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1793 \begin_layout Standard
1794 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1795 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1796 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1797 dialog and to modify the citation.
1800 \begin_layout Standard
1801 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1803 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1804 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1812 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1815 \begin_layout Standard
1816 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1817 you further to control the display.
1822 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1823 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1829 option keeps it in the current view state.
1830 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1831 \begin_inset space ~
1834 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1835 \begin_inset space ~
1838 3, the subsections of sections
1839 \begin_inset space ~
1842 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1847 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1848 \begin_inset space ~
1852 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1862 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1865 \begin_layout Standard
1872 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1873 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1887 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1888 So, for example, you can move section
1889 \begin_inset space ~
1893 \begin_inset space ~
1896 2.4 or after section
1897 \begin_inset space ~
1902 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1915 (or the corresponding key bindings
1923 ) you can change the level of sections.
1924 So you can for example make section
1925 \begin_inset space ~
1929 \begin_inset space ~
1933 \begin_inset space ~
1939 \begin_layout Subsection
1940 Horizontal Scrolling
1941 \begin_inset Index idx
1944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1945 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1953 \begin_layout Standard
1955 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1961 \begin_inset space \space{}
1965 \begin_inset space ~
1968 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1969 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1970 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1974 \begin_layout Standard
1975 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1979 \begin_layout Itemize
1981 is used on a small tablet computer
1984 \begin_layout Itemize
1985 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
1989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1997 \begin_inset space ~
2010 \begin_layout Itemize
2011 Math constructs with long command names
2014 \begin_layout Standard
2015 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2016 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2018 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2019 windows so that table
2020 \begin_inset space ~
2024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2026 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2031 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2033 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2034 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2037 \begin_layout Standard
2038 \begin_inset Float table
2044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2045 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2048 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2050 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2054 Horizontal scrolling test.
2062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2064 \begin_inset Tabular
2065 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2066 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2067 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2068 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2069 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2111 \begin_layout Section
2112 Input/Word Completion
2113 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2115 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2120 \begin_inset Index idx
2123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2130 \begin_inset Index idx
2133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2164 \begin_layout Standard
2166 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2168 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2169 is used to propose completions.
2172 \begin_layout Standard
2173 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2176 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2181 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2188 \begin_inset space ~
2192 \begin_inset space ~
2197 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2201 \begin_inset space ~
2206 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2207 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2211 \begin_inset space ~
2217 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2218 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2219 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2220 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2223 \begin_layout Standard
2225 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2226 completions available.
2231 key to accept a proposed completion.
2232 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2233 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2234 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2241 \begin_layout Standard
2242 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2243 ing options for text.
2244 The special math option
2248 enables characters to be composed.
2249 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2250 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2253 , you can then input the characters
2254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2265 to a formula to get it.
2266 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2267 of the math toolbar.
2268 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2272 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2273 's installation folder.
2274 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2283 \begin_layout Section
2285 \begin_inset Index idx
2288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2295 \begin_inset Index idx
2298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2327 \begin_inset Index idx
2330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2361 \begin_layout Standard
2362 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2376 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2379 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2383 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2384 \begin_inset space ~
2388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2390 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2397 \begin_layout Standard
2401 \begin_inset space ~
2409 \begin_inset space ~
2430 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2434 \begin_layout Labeling
2435 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2439 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2440 LatexCommand nomenclature
2442 description "Tabulator key"
2448 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2450 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2451 \begin_inset space ~
2455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2457 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2464 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2468 , especially section
2469 \begin_inset space ~
2473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2475 reference "subsec:Lists"
2481 If you are still confused, look in the
2486 \begin_inset Newline newline
2494 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2495 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2499 \begin_layout Labeling
2500 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2504 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2505 LatexCommand nomenclature
2507 description "Escape key"
2514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2521 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2522 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2525 \begin_layout Labeling
2526 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2532 \begin_inset space ~
2536 \begin_inset space ~
2543 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2544 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2548 \begin_layout Standard
2549 There are three modifier keys:
2552 \begin_layout Labeling
2553 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2571 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2572 LatexCommand nomenclature
2574 description "Control key"
2578 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2579 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2583 \begin_layout Itemize
2592 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2595 \begin_layout Itemize
2604 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2607 \begin_layout Itemize
2616 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2620 \begin_layout Labeling
2621 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2639 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2640 LatexCommand nomenclature
2642 description "Shift key"
2646 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2647 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2650 \begin_layout Labeling
2651 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2669 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2670 LatexCommand nomenclature
2672 description "Alt or Meta key"
2676 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2677 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2678 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2684 \begin_inset Newline newline
2687 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2689 menu accelerator keys
2692 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2693 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2697 \begin_layout Standard
2698 For example, the sequence
2699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2705 \begin_inset space ~
2709 \begin_inset space ~
2715 \begin_inset space ~
2723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2742 \begin_inset space ~
2748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2758 \begin_layout Standard
2763 manual lists all other things bound to the
2771 \begin_layout Standard
2772 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2774 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2775 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2776 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2777 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2778 The \SpecialChar LyX
2779 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2780 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2781 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2783 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2799 followed by a capital
2806 \begin_layout Chapter
2809 \begin_inset Index idx
2812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2822 \begin_layout Section
2824 \begin_inset Index idx
2827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2836 \begin_layout Subsection
2840 \begin_layout Standard
2841 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2842 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2843 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2844 numbering schemes, and so on.
2845 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2846 and format the title of your document differently.
2849 \begin_layout Standard
2854 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2855 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2856 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2857 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2858 picks one for you by default.
2859 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2862 \begin_layout Subsection
2864 \begin_inset Index idx
2867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2874 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2876 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2883 \begin_layout Standard
2884 You can select a class using the
2886 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2887 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2891 \begin_inset Index idx
2894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2901 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2905 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2909 \begin_layout Standard
2910 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2915 \begin_layout Description
2916 Article for basic articles
2919 \begin_layout Description
2920 Report for basic reports
2923 \begin_layout Description
2924 Book for writing a book
2927 \begin_layout Description
2928 Letter for US-style letters
2931 \begin_layout Standard
2932 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2933 only uses if you have installed
2934 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2935 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2936 distributions will include
2938 Here are some of the classes.
2939 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2941 Special Document Classes
2950 \begin_layout Description
2951 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2954 \begin_layout Description
2955 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2959 \begin_layout Description
2960 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2964 \begin_layout Description
2965 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2966 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2967 There are three article layouts available.
2968 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2969 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2970 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2971 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2976 sequential numbering
2977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2980 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2981 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2982 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2983 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2986 \begin_layout Description
2987 Beamer Layout for presentations
2990 \begin_layout Description
2991 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2992 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2993 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2994 with \SpecialChar LyX
2998 \begin_layout Description
2999 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3002 \begin_layout Description
3004 \begin_inset space ~
3007 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3010 \begin_layout Description
3011 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3014 \begin_layout Description
3015 Foils Used to make transparencies
3018 \begin_layout Description
3019 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3020 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3021 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3022 with \SpecialChar LyX
3026 \begin_layout Description
3027 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3028 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3031 \begin_layout Description
3032 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3035 \begin_layout Description
3036 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3039 \begin_layout Description
3040 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3041 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3042 (Is used by this document.)
3045 \begin_layout Description
3046 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3049 \begin_layout Description
3050 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3053 \begin_layout Description
3058 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3059 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3061 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3065 \begin_layout Description
3066 Slides Used to make transparencies
3069 \begin_layout Description
3071 \begin_inset space ~
3074 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3075 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3078 \begin_layout Description
3079 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3082 \begin_layout Standard
3083 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3085 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3087 Special Document Classes
3094 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3095 of the document classes.
3098 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3102 \begin_layout Standard
3103 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3105 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3106 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3108 \begin_inset Index idx
3111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3128 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3129 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3131 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3134 \begin_layout Standard
3137 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3142 , are highly specialized.
3144 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3145 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3146 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3147 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3148 by some document class.
3149 There are just too many of them.
3150 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3153 \begin_layout Standard
3154 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3162 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3163 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3164 document class for a new file.
3166 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3169 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3176 manual for information on how to install them.
3177 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3183 \begin_layout Standard
3184 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3185 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3186 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3187 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3188 class files to be used for dissertation
3189 s submitted to those universities.
3190 The \SpecialChar LyX
3191 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3193 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3197 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3203 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3206 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3208 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3210 name "subsec:Modules"
3215 \begin_inset Index idx
3218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3227 \begin_layout Standard
3228 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3229 chosen document class.
3230 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3231 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3238 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3242 \begin_inset Index idx
3245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3252 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3256 \begin_layout Standard
3257 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3258 packages or file format converters that are not always
3259 installed by default.
3261 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3262 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3263 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3264 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3266 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3267 file without the missing prerequisites.
3268 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3269 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3272 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3276 \begin_inset Index idx
3279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3280 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3286 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3291 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3294 \begin_layout Standard
3295 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3303 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3305 will advise you about these things.
3313 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3315 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3317 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3322 \begin_inset Index idx
3325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3326 Document ! Local Layout
3334 \begin_layout Standard
3335 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3336 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3337 : They are intended to be used in
3338 a variety of different documents.
3339 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3340 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3341 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3342 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3343 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3345 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3363 manual for information on how to use it.
3366 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3370 \begin_layout Standard
3371 Each class has a default set of options.
3372 Here's a quick table describing them:
3375 \begin_layout Standard
3376 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3382 \begin_layout Standard
3384 \begin_inset Tabular
3385 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3386 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3387 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3388 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3389 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3390 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3391 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3845 \begin_layout Standard
3846 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3852 \begin_layout Standard
3853 You're probably also wondering what
3854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3858 \begin_inset space ~
3862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3866 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3867 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3872 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3877 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3887 headings, there are also
3895 headings, and so on.
3896 We will describe these headings fully in section
3897 \begin_inset space ~
3901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3903 reference "subsec:Headings"
3910 \begin_layout Subsection
3912 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3914 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3919 \begin_inset Index idx
3922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3929 \begin_inset Index idx
3932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3941 \begin_layout Standard
3942 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3944 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3951 \begin_inset space ~
3959 \begin_inset space ~
3964 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3966 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3967 doesn't support special options you want to
3968 use for your document.
3969 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3970 -class and its options, you have to read
3974 \begin_layout Standard
3978 \begin_inset space ~
3985 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3991 \begin_inset space ~
3996 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3997 You can choose between the following five options:
4000 \begin_layout Labeling
4001 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4006 Use default page style of current class.
4009 \begin_layout Labeling
4010 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4015 No page numbers or headings.
4018 \begin_layout Labeling
4019 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4027 \begin_layout Labeling
4028 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4033 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4034 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4035 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4036 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4039 \begin_layout Labeling
4040 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4045 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4046 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4052 \begin_inset Index idx
4055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4057 -packages ! fancyhdr
4063 How they are defined is explained in section
4064 \begin_inset space ~
4068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4070 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4077 \begin_layout Standard
4078 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4079 \begin_inset space ~
4083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4085 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4092 \begin_layout Subsection
4093 Paper Size and Orientation
4094 \begin_inset Index idx
4097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4098 Document ! Paper size
4104 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4106 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4113 \begin_layout Standard
4114 You can find the following options in the menu
4117 \begin_inset space ~
4124 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4128 \begin_inset Index idx
4131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4140 \begin_layout Labeling
4141 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4145 \begin_inset space ~
4150 What size paper to print on.
4155 \begin_layout Itemize
4161 \begin_layout Itemize
4167 \begin_layout Itemize
4173 \begin_layout Itemize
4179 \begin_layout Itemize
4182 US letter, US legal, US executive
4185 \begin_layout Itemize
4191 \begin_layout Itemize
4198 \begin_layout Labeling
4199 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4204 To choose whether to output as
4215 \begin_layout Labeling
4216 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4220 \begin_inset space ~
4225 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4226 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4229 \begin_layout Subsection
4231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4233 name "subsec:Margins"
4238 \begin_inset Index idx
4241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4248 \begin_inset Index idx
4251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4260 \begin_layout Standard
4261 Paper margins are set in the menu
4263 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4267 \begin_inset Index idx
4270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4279 \begin_layout Standard
4280 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4281 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4282 the paper format and the font size into account.
4285 \begin_layout Subsection
4289 \begin_layout Standard
4290 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4296 That includes the paragraph environments.
4297 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4298 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4299 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4301 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4310 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4312 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4313 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4314 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4317 \begin_layout Section
4318 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4319 \begin_inset Index idx
4322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4323 Paragraph ! Indentation
4331 \begin_layout Subsection
4333 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4335 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4342 \begin_layout Standard
4343 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4344 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4347 \begin_layout Standard
4348 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4349 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4350 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4351 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4355 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4361 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4362 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4363 language than English.
4365 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4368 \begin_layout Standard
4369 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4370 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4371 into \SpecialChar LyX
4373 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4376 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4378 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4379 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4380 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4387 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4388 goes to produce a printable file.
4393 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4395 gives you the ability globally to change
4399 these pre-coded spacings.
4400 We will explain more later.
4403 \begin_layout Subsection
4404 Paragraph Separation
4405 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4407 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4412 \begin_inset Index idx
4415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4416 Paragraph ! Separation
4424 \begin_layout Standard
4432 \begin_inset space ~
4440 \begin_inset space ~
4447 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4451 \begin_inset Index idx
4454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4460 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4463 \begin_layout Subsection
4467 \begin_layout Standard
4468 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4471 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4473 \begin_inset space ~
4478 dialog and toggle the
4481 \begin_inset space ~
4486 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4489 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4493 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4494 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4498 \begin_layout Standard
4499 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4500 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4503 \begin_layout Subsection
4505 \begin_inset Index idx
4508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4509 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4517 \begin_layout Standard
4520 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4524 \begin_inset Index idx
4527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4536 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4540 \begin_inset space ~
4549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4550 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4556 \begin_inset Index idx
4559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4561 -packages ! setspace
4566 installed to use this feature.
4571 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4573 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4575 \begin_inset space ~
4580 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4581 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4584 \begin_layout Section
4585 Paragraph Environments
4586 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4588 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4593 \begin_inset Index idx
4596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4597 Paragraph ! Environments
4603 \begin_inset Index idx
4606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4607 Paragraph environments|(
4615 \begin_layout Subsection
4619 \begin_layout Standard
4620 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4623 \begin_layout Standard
4632 } \SpecialChar ldots
4642 \begin_inset Newline newline
4645 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4647 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4648 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4649 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4658 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4661 \begin_layout Standard
4662 A paragraph environment is simply a
4663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4670 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4671 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4672 scheme, labels, and so on.
4673 Additionally, you can
4674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4681 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4682 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4683 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4684 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4686 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4688 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4691 \begin_layout Standard
4692 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4693 \begin_inset Graphics
4694 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4700 at the left end of the toolbar.
4702 will change the environment of the
4706 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4707 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4708 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4712 \begin_layout Standard
4721 create a new paragraph using the
4725 paragraph environment.
4727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4734 because if you are in one of these environments:
4737 \begin_layout Itemize
4743 \begin_layout Itemize
4749 \begin_layout Itemize
4755 \begin_layout Itemize
4761 \begin_layout Itemize
4767 \begin_layout Itemize
4773 \begin_layout Itemize
4779 \begin_layout Standard
4781 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4785 , rather than resetting it to
4790 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4791 \begin_inset space ~
4795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4797 reference "sec:Nesting"
4804 \begin_layout Subsection
4808 \begin_layout Standard
4809 The default paragraph environment is
4814 It creates a plain paragraph.
4816 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4817 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4818 this manual) are in the
4825 \begin_layout Standard
4826 You can nest a paragraph using the
4830 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4838 \begin_layout Subsection
4840 \begin_inset Index idx
4843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4852 \begin_layout Standard
4853 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4854 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4863 for thanks or contact information.
4864 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4865 places all of this on a separate page
4866 along with today's date.
4867 For other types of documents, the title
4868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4875 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4879 \begin_layout Standard
4881 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4895 Here's how you use them:
4898 \begin_layout Itemize
4899 Put the title of your document in the
4906 \begin_layout Itemize
4907 Put the author name in the
4914 \begin_layout Itemize
4915 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4916 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4922 Note that using this environment is optional.
4923 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4924 will automatically insert today's date.
4925 If you don't want a date, use the option
4927 Suppress default date on front page
4931 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4932 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4934 \begin_inset space ~
4942 \begin_layout Standard
4943 You can use footnotes to insert
4944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4951 or contact information.
4954 \begin_layout Subsection
4956 \begin_inset Index idx
4959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4966 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4968 name "subsec:Headings"
4975 \begin_layout Standard
4976 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4978 takes care of the numbering for you.
4981 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4983 \begin_inset Index idx
4986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4987 Section headings ! Numbered
4995 \begin_layout Standard
4996 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5000 \begin_layout Enumerate
5006 \begin_layout Enumerate
5012 \begin_layout Enumerate
5018 \begin_layout Enumerate
5024 \begin_layout Enumerate
5030 \begin_layout Enumerate
5036 \begin_layout Enumerate
5042 \begin_layout Standard
5044 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5045 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5046 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5049 \begin_layout Standard
5050 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5051 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5052 You group the book into chapters.
5054 does a similar grouping:
5057 \begin_layout Itemize
5062 is divided into either
5073 \begin_layout Itemize
5085 \begin_layout Itemize
5097 \begin_layout Itemize
5109 \begin_layout Itemize
5121 \begin_layout Itemize
5133 \begin_layout Standard
5134 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5142 Not all document types use the
5146 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5151 is the top-level heading.
5159 \begin_layout Standard
5164 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5165 labels it with its number,
5166 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5168 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5180 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5182 \begin_inset Index idx
5185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5186 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5194 \begin_layout Standard
5195 The unnumbered section headings have a
5196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5203 at the end of their name.
5204 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5205 the table of contents, see section
5206 \begin_inset space ~
5210 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5219 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5220 Changing the Numbering
5221 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5223 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5230 \begin_layout Standard
5231 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5232 in the Table of Contents.
5233 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5235 Just as certain classes start with
5249 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5259 This is something you can change.
5262 \begin_layout Standard
5265 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5269 \begin_inset Index idx
5272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5281 \begin_inset space ~
5285 \begin_inset space ~
5290 you will see two counters.
5295 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5296 numbers a section heading.
5297 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5301 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5302 Short Titles of Headings
5303 \begin_inset Index idx
5306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5307 Section headings ! Short titles
5313 \begin_inset Argument 1
5316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5323 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5325 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5332 \begin_layout Standard
5333 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5334 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5335 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5336 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5339 \begin_layout Standard
5341 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5342 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5343 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5344 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5347 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5349 \begin_inset space ~
5355 This will insert a box labeled
5356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5360 \begin_inset space ~
5364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5367 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5368 This also works for captions inside floats.
5369 There can only be one short title per title.
5372 \begin_layout Standard
5373 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5376 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5380 \begin_layout Standard
5381 The following information applies to all section headings:
5384 \begin_layout Itemize
5385 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5388 \begin_layout Itemize
5389 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5392 \begin_layout Itemize
5393 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5396 \begin_layout Itemize
5397 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5400 \begin_layout Subsection
5404 \begin_layout Standard
5406 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5420 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5421 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5422 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5423 the text they contain.
5424 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5432 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5435 \begin_layout Standard
5436 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5445 when you start a new paragraph.
5446 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5450 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5451 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5452 have to change back to the
5456 environment yourself.
5459 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5461 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5468 \begin_inset Index idx
5471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5480 \begin_layout Standard
5481 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5482 time for the differences.
5491 are identical except for one difference:
5495 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5504 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5507 \begin_layout Standard
5508 Here's an example of the
5521 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5523 See – no indentation!
5527 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5528 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5529 the other paragraph.
5532 \begin_layout Standard
5533 Here's another example, this time in the
5540 \begin_layout Quotation
5546 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5547 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5548 the first line, then
5552 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5556 you were quoting other text.
5559 \begin_layout Quotation
5560 Here's a new paragraph.
5561 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5562 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5565 \begin_layout Standard
5566 As the examples show,
5570 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5571 They should put quotes in the
5576 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5580 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5583 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5585 \begin_inset Index idx
5588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5595 \begin_inset Index idx
5598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5614 \begin_layout Standard
5619 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5625 \begin_inset Newline newline
5628 Which I did not rehearse!
5632 It could be much worse.
5633 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5635 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5636 indented a bit more than the first.
5637 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5643 \begin_inset Newline newline
5646 And make things look fine
5647 \begin_inset Newline newline
5653 arg "newline-insert newline"
5659 \begin_layout Standard
5664 does not indent both margins.
5665 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5666 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5669 arg "newline-insert newline"
5675 \begin_layout Subsection
5677 \begin_inset Index idx
5680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5687 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5696 \begin_layout Standard
5698 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5708 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5709 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5718 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5719 lets you provide your own label.
5720 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5721 describing some general features of all four of them.
5724 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5728 \begin_layout Standard
5729 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5731 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5732 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5741 reset the environment to
5745 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5746 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5747 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5751 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5755 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5762 \begin_layout Standard
5763 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5764 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5765 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5767 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5768 you read all of section
5769 \begin_inset space ~
5773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5775 reference "sec:Nesting"
5782 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5784 \begin_inset Index idx
5787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5794 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5803 \begin_layout Standard
5804 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5808 paragraph environment.
5809 It has the following properties:
5812 \begin_layout Itemize
5813 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5817 \begin_layout Itemize
5819 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5822 \begin_layout Itemize
5823 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5827 \begin_layout Itemize
5828 The items can have any length.
5830 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5831 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5838 \begin_layout Itemize
5843 environment inside another
5847 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5851 \begin_layout Itemize
5852 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5855 \begin_layout Itemize
5857 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5860 \begin_layout Itemize
5862 \begin_inset space ~
5866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5868 reference "sec:Nesting"
5872 for a full explanation of nesting.
5876 \begin_layout Standard
5877 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5886 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5889 \begin_layout Standard
5890 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5891 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5894 \begin_layout Itemize
5895 The label for the first level
5899 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5903 \begin_layout Itemize
5904 The label for the second level is a dash.
5908 \begin_layout Itemize
5909 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5913 \begin_layout Itemize
5914 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5918 \begin_layout Itemize
5919 Back out to the third level.
5923 \begin_layout Itemize
5924 Back to the second level.
5928 \begin_layout Itemize
5929 Back to the outermost level.
5932 \begin_layout Standard
5933 These are the default labels for an
5938 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5940 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5943 dialog in the submenu
5948 \begin_inset Index idx
5951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5957 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5961 \begin_layout Standard
5962 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5963 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5965 \begin_inset space ~
5969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5971 reference "sec:Nesting"
5978 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5980 \begin_inset Index idx
5983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5990 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5992 name "sec:Enumerate"
5999 \begin_layout Standard
6004 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6005 It has these properties:
6008 \begin_layout Enumerate
6009 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6013 \begin_layout Enumerate
6014 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6018 \begin_layout Enumerate
6020 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6023 \begin_layout Enumerate
6028 environment resets the counter to one.
6031 \begin_layout Enumerate
6044 \begin_layout Enumerate
6045 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6046 Items can have any length.
6049 \begin_layout Enumerate
6050 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6053 \begin_layout Enumerate
6054 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6057 \begin_layout Enumerate
6058 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6062 \begin_layout Standard
6071 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6073 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6074 labels the four different levels in an
6081 \begin_layout Enumerate
6082 The first level of an
6086 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6090 \begin_layout Enumerate
6091 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6095 \begin_layout Enumerate
6096 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6100 \begin_layout Enumerate
6101 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6104 \begin_layout Enumerate
6105 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6110 \begin_layout Enumerate
6111 Back to the third level
6115 \begin_layout Enumerate
6116 Back to the second level.
6120 \begin_layout Enumerate
6121 Back to the outermost level.
6124 \begin_layout Standard
6125 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6129 environment, see section
6130 \begin_inset space ~
6134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6136 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6141 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6145 \begin_layout Standard
6146 There is more to nesting
6150 environments than we've stated here.
6151 You should read section
6152 \begin_inset space ~
6156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6158 reference "sec:Nesting"
6162 to learn more about nesting.
6165 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6167 \begin_inset Index idx
6170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6179 \begin_layout Standard
6180 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6184 list has no fixed label.
6185 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6194 of the first line as the label.
6198 \begin_layout Description
6199 Example: This is an example of the
6206 \begin_layout Standard
6208 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6212 \begin_layout Standard
6214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6221 it is meant that the first usage of the
6225 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6227 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6235 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6240 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6241 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6243 \begin_inset space ~
6249 \begin_inset space ~
6253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6255 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6259 for more information.) Here is an example:
6262 \begin_layout Description
6264 \begin_inset space ~
6267 Example: This one shows how to use a
6270 \begin_inset space ~
6282 \begin_layout Description
6283 Usage: You should use the
6287 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6288 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6290 It's not a good idea to use a
6294 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6295 You're better off using
6307 paragraphs into them.
6310 \begin_layout Description
6311 Nesting: You can nest
6315 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6319 \begin_layout Standard
6320 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6321 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6322 them from the first line.
6325 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6327 \begin_inset Index idx
6330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6339 \begin_layout Standard
6344 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6345 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6349 \begin_layout Standard
6358 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6360 Here are its properties:
6363 \begin_layout Labeling
6364 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6366 \begin_inset space ~
6369 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6378 of each line as the item label.
6383 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6384 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6385 space as described above.
6388 \begin_layout Labeling
6389 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6390 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6391 uses different margins for the item label and the
6392 body of the item text.
6393 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6394 label width plus a little extra space.
6398 \begin_layout Labeling
6399 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6401 \begin_inset space ~
6404 width \SpecialChar LyX
6405 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6406 If the label width is larger, the label
6407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6414 into the first line.
6415 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6416 margin of the rest of the item text.
6419 \begin_layout Labeling
6420 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6422 \begin_inset space ~
6425 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6430 environment has the same left margin.
6431 \begin_inset Newline newline
6434 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6437 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6439 \begin_inset space ~
6444 dialog (toolbar button
6447 arg "layout-paragraph"
6454 \begin_inset space ~
6459 determines the default label width.
6460 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6469 multiple times instead.
6470 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6480 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6483 \begin_inset space ~
6488 every time you alter a label in a
6493 \begin_inset Newline newline
6496 The predefined default width is the length of
6497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6505 \begin_inset space ~
6511 \begin_layout Standard
6516 list the same way as the
6520 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6526 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6530 \begin_layout Standard
6535 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6536 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6538 \begin_inset space ~
6542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6544 reference "sec:Nesting"
6548 to learn about nesting.
6551 \begin_layout Standard
6552 There is yet another feature of the
6556 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6557 left-justifies the item labels by
6559 You can use additional
6563 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6564 justifies the item label.
6569 are documented in section
6570 \begin_inset space ~
6574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6576 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6581 Here are some examples:
6584 \begin_layout Labeling
6585 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6586 Left The default for
6593 \begin_layout Labeling
6594 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6595 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6602 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6605 \begin_layout Labeling
6606 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6607 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6611 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6618 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6621 \begin_layout Subsection
6623 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6625 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6630 \begin_inset Index idx
6633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6642 \begin_layout Standard
6643 The features described in this section require that the module
6645 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6647 is loaded in the document settings.
6648 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6654 \begin_inset Index idx
6657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6659 -packages ! enumitem
6667 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6668 Custom Enumerate Lists
6669 \begin_inset Index idx
6672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6673 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6681 \begin_layout Standard
6683 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6686 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6689 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6690 There you add the command
6693 \begin_layout Standard
6701 \begin_layout Standard
6713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6714 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6715 Code, look at section
6716 \begin_inset space ~
6720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6722 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6735 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6742 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6743 For capital Roman numerals replace
6755 in the command above.
6756 For Arabic numerals use
6764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6771 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6786 \begin_layout Standard
6788 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6796 You can only number 26
6797 \begin_inset space ~
6800 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6808 \begin_layout Standard
6809 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6810 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6813 \begin_layout Standard
6814 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6817 \begin_layout Enumerate
6818 \begin_inset Argument 1
6821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6847 \begin_layout Enumerate
6848 \begin_inset Argument 1
6851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6874 \begin_layout Enumerate
6879 \begin_layout Enumerate
6880 \begin_inset Argument 1
6883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6907 \begin_layout Enumerate
6908 \begin_inset Argument 1
6911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6937 \begin_layout Standard
6938 For this list these commands were used:
6941 \begin_layout Standard
6952 \begin_inset Newline newline
6960 \begin_inset Newline newline
6968 \begin_inset Newline newline
6978 \begin_layout Standard
6985 makes the label emphasized and
6994 \begin_layout Standard
6995 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7003 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7004 lists until you change the definition.
7012 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7014 \begin_inset Index idx
7017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7018 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7026 \begin_layout Standard
7027 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7030 \begin_layout Enumerate
7031 \begin_inset Argument 1
7034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7053 \begin_inset Note Note
7056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7057 goes back to default numbering
7065 \begin_layout Enumerate
7069 \begin_layout Standard
7073 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7077 \begin_layout Standard
7078 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7083 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7084 to indicate that it is a resumed
7085 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7086 , but in the output.
7089 \begin_layout Standard
7090 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7098 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7107 \begin_layout Standard
7108 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7110 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7111 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7112 of a normal enumeration.
7113 There, insert the command
7116 \begin_layout Standard
7122 \begin_layout Standard
7127 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7131 \begin_layout Enumerate
7135 \begin_layout Enumerate
7139 \begin_layout Standard
7140 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7143 \begin_layout Enumerate
7144 \begin_inset Argument 1
7147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7163 This enumeration starts at 4
7166 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7168 \begin_inset Index idx
7171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7180 \begin_layout Standard
7181 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7183 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7186 \begin_layout Itemize
7190 \begin_layout Itemize
7191 with standard spacing
7194 \begin_layout Standard
7195 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7197 Add there the command
7201 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7204 \begin_layout Itemize
7205 \begin_inset Argument 1
7208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7227 \begin_layout Itemize
7231 \begin_layout Itemize
7235 \begin_layout Standard
7236 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7243 \begin_inset Index idx
7246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7248 -packages ! enumitem
7254 For more information see its documentation,
7255 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7264 \begin_layout Standard
7265 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7267 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7268 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7269 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7272 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7275 \begin_layout Enumerate
7276 \begin_inset Argument 1
7279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7287 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7300 \begin_layout Enumerate
7301 with negative indentation
7304 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7305 Further Customization
7306 \begin_inset Index idx
7309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7310 Lists ! Customization
7318 \begin_layout Standard
7319 You can also change the style of description lists.
7323 \begin_layout Standard
7329 \begin_layout Standard
7330 changes the description label font, the command
7333 \begin_layout Standard
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 sets the list style.
7343 \begin_layout Standard
7344 An example where the command
7347 \begin_layout Standard
7352 itshape, style=nextline
7355 \begin_layout Standard
7359 \begin_layout Description
7361 \begin_inset space ~
7365 \begin_inset Argument 1
7368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7374 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7376 itshape, style=nextline
7386 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7387 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7391 \begin_layout Description
7393 \begin_inset space ~
7396 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7397 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7398 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7401 \begin_layout Standard
7402 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7408 \begin_inset Index idx
7411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7413 -packages ! enumitem
7419 For more information see its documentation
7420 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7429 \begin_layout Subsection
7431 \begin_inset Index idx
7434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7443 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7445 \begin_inset space ~
7448 Address: An Overview
7451 \begin_layout Standard
7452 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7453 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7461 \begin_inset space ~
7467 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7468 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7469 gags on the document.
7470 In contrast, you can use the
7477 \begin_inset space ~
7482 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7483 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7487 \begin_layout Standard
7488 Of course, you're not limited to using
7495 \begin_inset space ~
7504 \begin_inset space ~
7509 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7510 some European academic papers.
7513 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7515 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7517 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7524 \begin_layout Standard
7529 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7530 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7534 \begin_inset space ~
7539 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7540 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7541 Here's an example of each:
7544 \begin_layout Right Address
7546 \begin_inset Newline newline
7550 \begin_inset Newline newline
7554 \begin_inset Newline newline
7557 When is it? What is today?
7560 \begin_layout Standard
7564 \begin_inset space ~
7570 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7572 the largest block of text on a single line.
7573 Here's an example of the
7580 \begin_layout Address
7582 \begin_inset Newline newline
7585 Where do I send this
7586 \begin_inset Newline newline
7589 Your post office and country
7592 \begin_layout Standard
7593 As you can see, both
7600 \begin_inset space ~
7605 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7610 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7611 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7617 This makes sense, since
7625 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7626 Thus, you have to use
7633 arg "newline-insert newline"
7638 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7639 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7641 \begin_inset space ~
7645 \begin_inset space ~
7650 ) to start a new line in an
7657 \begin_inset space ~
7665 \begin_layout Subsection
7669 \begin_layout Standard
7670 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7671 or list of references.
7673 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7676 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7678 \begin_inset Index idx
7681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7690 \begin_layout Standard
7695 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7696 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7697 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7698 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7712 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7713 The book document classes ignores the
7717 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7721 in a letter document class.
7724 \begin_layout Standard
7729 environment does several things for you.
7730 First, it puts the centered label
7731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7739 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7741 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7742 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7743 the subsequent text.
7744 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7746 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7750 \begin_layout Standard
7751 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7755 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7756 The new paragraph will still be in the
7761 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7762 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7765 \begin_layout Standard
7766 \begin_inset Float figure
7771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7773 \begin_inset Graphics
7774 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7782 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7785 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7787 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7808 \begin_layout Standard
7809 We would love to demonstrate the
7813 environment, but since this document is in the
7814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7821 class, we can't do this.
7822 We inserted it therefore as figure
7823 \begin_inset space ~
7827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7829 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7834 If you have never heard of an
7835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7842 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7845 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7847 \begin_inset Index idx
7850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7859 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7866 \begin_layout Standard
7871 environment is used to list references.
7872 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7873 only use it at the end of the document.
7885 \begin_layout Standard
7886 When you first open a
7890 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7891 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7907 depending on the document class.
7908 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7909 Each paragraph of the
7913 environment is a bibliography entry.
7918 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7919 Each new paragraph is still in the
7926 \begin_layout Standard
7927 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7928 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7930 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7932 handling, have a look at section
7933 \begin_inset space ~
7937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7939 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7946 \begin_layout Subsection
7947 Special Environments
7950 \begin_layout Standard
7952 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7953 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7956 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7961 \begin_inset Index idx
7964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7972 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7974 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7981 \begin_layout Standard
7987 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7989 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7994 key as a fixed whitespace.
7998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8011 \begin_inset space ~
8016 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8034 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8037 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8040 arg "newline-insert newline"
8057 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8058 So, when you finish using the
8063 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8064 Also, you can nest the
8069 environment inside of others.
8072 \begin_layout Standard
8073 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8076 \begin_layout Itemize
8080 arg "newline-insert newline"
8083 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8084 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8088 \begin_inset space \space{}
8098 arg "newline-insert newline"
8104 \begin_layout Itemize
8108 arg "newline-insert newline"
8118 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8124 \begin_layout Itemize
8125 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8126 You must put at least one
8130 in any line you want blank.
8131 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8135 \begin_layout Itemize
8136 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8140 since that will insert
8145 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8148 arg "self-insert \""
8154 \begin_layout Standard
8158 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8162 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8166 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8170 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8174 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8175 printf("Hello World!
8180 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8184 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8188 \begin_layout Standard
8189 This is just the standard
8190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8201 \begin_layout Standard
8207 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8209 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8210 as if you used a typewriter.
8211 \begin_inset Index idx
8214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8215 Paragraph environments|)
8220 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8223 Program Code Listings
8228 \begin_inset space ~
8236 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8240 \begin_inset Index idx
8243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8252 \begin_layout Standard
8257 environment is similar to the
8262 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8263 computer console text.
8268 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8282 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8283 you can have empty lines.
8296 \begin_layout Itemize
8297 have a certain language and a text style
8300 \begin_layout Itemize
8301 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8302 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8303 and \SpecialChar TeX
8307 \begin_layout Standard
8308 Because of these properties
8312 works like a typewriter.
8316 \begin_layout Verbatim
8320 \begin_layout Verbatim
8323 The following 2 lines are empty:
8326 \begin_layout Verbatim
8330 \begin_layout Verbatim
8334 \begin_layout Verbatim
8335 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8340 \begin_layout Standard
8345 environment is identical to
8349 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8350 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8357 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8361 \begin_layout Section
8362 Nesting Environments
8363 \begin_inset Index idx
8366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8367 Nesting ! Environments
8373 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8382 \begin_layout Subsection
8386 \begin_layout Standard
8388 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8390 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8392 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8394 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8406 \begin_layout Enumerate
8410 \begin_layout Enumerate
8415 \begin_layout Enumerate
8419 \begin_layout Enumerate
8424 \begin_layout Enumerate
8428 \begin_layout Standard
8429 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8430 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8432 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8434 \begin_inset space ~
8438 \begin_inset space ~
8446 \begin_inset space ~
8450 \begin_inset space ~
8455 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8457 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8460 arg "depth-increment"
8466 arg "depth-decrement"
8480 arg "depth-increment"
8486 arg "depth-decrement"
8490 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8491 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8495 \begin_layout Standard
8496 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8497 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8498 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8499 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8500 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8503 \begin_layout Standard
8504 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8506 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8508 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8511 \begin_layout Subsection
8512 What You Can and Can't Nest
8515 \begin_layout Standard
8516 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8517 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8520 \begin_layout Standard
8521 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8522 than a simple yes or no.
8523 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8526 \begin_layout Itemize
8527 Completely unnestable
8530 \begin_layout Itemize
8531 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8535 \begin_layout Itemize
8536 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8540 \begin_layout Standard
8541 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8542 environments have them:
8545 \begin_layout Description
8546 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8547 Can't nest into them.
8551 \begin_layout Itemize
8557 \begin_layout Itemize
8563 \begin_layout Itemize
8569 \begin_layout Itemize
8575 \begin_layout Itemize
8582 \begin_layout Description
8584 \begin_inset space ~
8587 Nestable You can nest them.
8588 You can nest other things into them.
8592 \begin_layout Itemize
8598 \begin_layout Itemize
8604 \begin_layout Itemize
8610 \begin_layout Itemize
8616 \begin_layout Itemize
8622 \begin_layout Itemize
8628 \begin_layout Itemize
8634 \begin_layout Itemize
8641 \begin_layout Itemize
8647 \begin_layout Itemize
8654 \begin_layout Description
8655 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8656 You can't nest anything into them.
8660 \begin_layout Itemize
8666 \begin_layout Itemize
8672 \begin_layout Itemize
8678 \begin_layout Itemize
8684 \begin_layout Itemize
8690 \begin_layout Itemize
8696 \begin_layout Itemize
8702 \begin_layout Itemize
8708 \begin_layout Itemize
8714 \begin_layout Itemize
8720 \begin_layout Itemize
8726 \begin_layout Itemize
8732 \begin_layout Itemize
8738 \begin_layout Itemize
8742 \begin_inset space ~
8748 \begin_layout Itemize
8755 \begin_layout Standard
8756 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8764 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8774 \begin_inset space ~
8777 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8778 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8779 nested section headings violate this.
8787 \begin_layout Subsection
8788 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8789 \begin_inset Index idx
8792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8793 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8801 \begin_layout Standard
8802 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8803 affected by nesting anyhow.
8807 \begin_layout Itemize
8811 \begin_layout Itemize
8815 \begin_layout Itemize
8819 \begin_layout Standard
8821 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8829 Figures and tables in
8833 are not affected by this.
8838 Have a look at section
8839 \begin_inset space ~
8843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8845 reference "sec:Floats"
8849 for more information about
8856 \begin_layout Standard
8858 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8859 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8863 \begin_layout Standard
8864 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8872 of its own, it behaves just like a
8873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8880 paragraph environment.
8881 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8885 \begin_layout Standard
8886 Here's an example with a table:
8889 \begin_layout Enumerate
8894 \begin_layout Enumerate
8895 This is (a) and it's nested.
8899 \begin_layout Standard
8900 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8906 \begin_layout Standard
8908 \begin_inset Tabular
8909 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8910 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8911 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8912 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8996 \begin_layout Standard
8997 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9004 \begin_layout Enumerate
9006 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9010 \begin_layout Enumerate
9014 \begin_layout Standard
9015 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9018 \begin_layout Enumerate
9023 \begin_layout Enumerate
9024 This is (a) and it's nested.
9028 \begin_layout Standard
9029 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9035 \begin_layout Standard
9037 \begin_inset Tabular
9038 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9039 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9040 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9041 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9125 \begin_layout Standard
9126 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9132 \begin_layout Enumerate
9139 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9142 \begin_layout Enumerate
9146 \begin_layout Standard
9147 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9151 \begin_layout Standard
9152 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9155 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9158 \begin_layout Enumerate
9163 \begin_layout Enumerate
9164 This is (a) and it's nested.
9167 \begin_layout Standard
9168 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9174 \begin_layout Standard
9176 \begin_inset Tabular
9177 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9178 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9179 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9180 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9265 \begin_layout Standard
9266 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9272 \begin_layout Enumerate
9274 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9281 \begin_layout Enumerate
9285 \begin_layout Standard
9286 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9292 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9293 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9297 \begin_layout Subsection
9298 Usage and General Features
9301 \begin_layout Standard
9302 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9303 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9312 is the innermost possible depth.
9313 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9316 \begin_layout Enumerate
9317 level #1 – outermost
9321 \begin_layout Enumerate
9326 \begin_layout Enumerate
9331 \begin_layout Enumerate
9336 \begin_layout Itemize
9341 \begin_layout Itemize
9350 \begin_layout Standard
9351 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9352 both of them in the example.
9353 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9363 For example, if we tried to nest another
9368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9375 , we would get errors.
9378 \begin_layout Subsection
9380 \begin_inset Index idx
9383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9392 \begin_layout Standard
9393 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9394 We have several examples of nested environments.
9395 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9399 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9400 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9403 \begin_layout Labeling
9404 \labelwidthstring MMM
9405 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9414 \begin_layout Labeling
9415 \labelwidthstring MMM
9416 #2-a This is level #2.
9417 We created it by using
9420 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9426 arg "depth-increment"
9433 \begin_layout Labeling
9434 \labelwidthstring MMM
9435 #3-a This is level #3.
9436 This time, we just enter
9443 arg "depth-increment"
9447 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9451 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9457 arg "depth-increment"
9464 \begin_layout Standard
9469 environment, nested inside of
9470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9478 So, it's at level #4.
9479 We did this by entering
9482 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9488 arg "depth-increment"
9491 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9496 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9512 \begin_layout Standard
9517 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9520 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9526 \begin_layout Labeling
9527 \labelwidthstring MMM
9528 #4-a This is level #4.
9532 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9535 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9540 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9544 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9549 keep nesting things inside
9550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9561 \begin_layout Labeling
9562 \labelwidthstring MMM
9563 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9568 \begin_layout Labeling
9569 \labelwidthstring MMM
9570 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9571 and this is level #6.
9572 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9576 \begin_layout Labeling
9577 \labelwidthstring MMM
9578 #5-b Back to level #5.
9582 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9588 arg "depth-decrement"
9595 \begin_layout Labeling
9596 \labelwidthstring MMM
9600 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9606 arg "depth-decrement"
9609 , we're back at level #4.
9613 \begin_layout Labeling
9614 \labelwidthstring MMM
9615 #3-b Back to level #3.
9616 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9620 \begin_layout Labeling
9621 \labelwidthstring MMM
9622 #2-b Back to level #2.
9627 \begin_layout Labeling
9628 \labelwidthstring MMM
9629 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9630 After this sentence, we will enter
9634 and change the paragraph environment back to
9641 \begin_layout Standard
9642 We could have also used the
9658 environment in place of the
9663 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9666 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9667 Example 2: Inheritance
9670 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9671 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9674 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9683 arg "depth-increment"
9687 \begin_inset Newline newline
9690 which, we will change to the
9698 \begin_layout Enumerate
9703 environment, at level #2.
9706 \begin_layout Enumerate
9707 Notice how the nested
9711 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9715 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9719 \begin_layout Standard
9720 We ended this example by entering
9725 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9729 and reset the nesting depth by using
9732 arg "depth-decrement"
9738 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9739 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9748 \begin_inset Argument 1
9751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9752 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9760 \begin_layout Enumerate
9761 This is level #1, in an
9765 paragraph environment.
9766 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9770 \begin_layout Enumerate
9775 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9781 arg "depth-increment"
9785 Now, what happens if we nest an
9789 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9790 label be? An asterisk?
9794 \begin_layout Itemize
9804 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9805 So, its label is a bullet.
9806 (We got here by using
9809 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9815 arg "depth-increment"
9818 , then changing the environment to
9826 \begin_layout Itemize
9827 Here's level #4, produced using
9830 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9836 arg "depth-increment"
9840 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9845 \begin_layout Enumerate
9848 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9853 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9857 , because we are in the
9865 environment (that is, it is an
9880 \begin_layout Enumerate
9885 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9886 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9890 \begin_layout Enumerate
9891 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9894 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9897 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9900 \begin_layout Enumerate
9904 arg "depth-decrement"
9907 to decrease the depth after the next
9910 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9917 \begin_layout Enumerate
9919 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9924 \begin_layout Enumerate
9926 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9927 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9931 \begin_layout Enumerate
9932 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9941 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9946 reset the counter for the label.
9950 \begin_layout Enumerate
9954 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9960 arg "depth-decrement"
9963 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9964 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9965 into the twofold-nested
9973 \begin_layout Enumerate
9974 The same thing happens if we do another
9977 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9983 arg "depth-decrement"
9986 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9989 \begin_layout Standard
9990 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9995 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10006 The number of other
10010 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10017 The same rule applies for the
10021 environment, as well.
10024 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10025 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10028 \begin_layout Enumerate
10029 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10030 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10031 the same detail with how we did it.
10040 \begin_layout Standard
10048 arg "depth-increment"
10055 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10056 the example in parentheses someplace.
10057 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10058 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10059 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10063 \begin_layout Enumerate
10068 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10072 \begin_layout Verse
10073 Now we will add verse.
10074 \begin_inset Newline newline
10077 It will get much worse.
10078 \begin_inset Newline newline
10088 arg "depth-increment"
10098 \begin_layout Verse
10099 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10100 \begin_inset Newline newline
10103 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10104 \begin_inset Newline newline
10110 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10118 \begin_layout Verse
10119 Here comes a table:
10123 \begin_layout Standard
10124 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10130 \begin_layout Standard
10132 \begin_inset Tabular
10133 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10134 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10135 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10136 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10221 \begin_layout Verse
10225 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10235 arg "depth-increment"
10241 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10247 \begin_inset Newline newline
10255 arg "depth-decrement"
10262 \begin_layout Enumerate
10267 : level #1) This is another item.
10268 Note that selecting a
10272 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10273 3 times to put the table inside the
10281 \begin_layout Quotation
10282 We're now ending the
10286 list and changing to
10291 We're still at level #1.
10292 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10293 The next set of paragraphs is a
10294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10301 We will nest both the
10308 \begin_inset space ~
10313 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10317 for the letter body.
10321 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10324 to preserve the depth.
10325 Remember that you need to use
10328 arg "newline-insert newline"
10331 to create multiple lines inside the
10338 \begin_inset space ~
10348 \begin_layout Right Address
10350 \begin_inset Newline newline
10353 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10354 \begin_inset Newline newline
10360 \begin_layout Address
10362 \begin_inset space ~
10368 \begin_layout Quotation
10369 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10370 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10373 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10374 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10375 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10376 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10377 as soon as possible.
10378 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10381 \begin_layout Quotation
10382 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10383 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10384 with your order, along with payment.
10387 \begin_layout Quotation
10388 We thank you again for your patience.
10391 \begin_layout Address
10393 \begin_inset Newline newline
10400 \begin_layout Quotation
10401 That ends that example!
10404 \begin_layout Standard
10405 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10406 gives you a lot of power with just
10408 We could have easily nested an
10429 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10432 \begin_layout Subsection
10434 \begin_inset Index idx
10437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10438 Nesting ! Separation
10444 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10446 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10453 \begin_layout Standard
10454 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10456 For example you need two different enumerations:
10459 \begin_layout Enumerate
10464 \begin_layout Enumerate
10469 \begin_layout Enumerate
10473 \begin_layout Standard
10474 \begin_inset Separator plain
10480 \begin_layout Itemize
10486 \begin_layout Standard
10487 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10493 \begin_layout Enumerate
10497 \begin_layout Enumerate
10501 \begin_layout Enumerate
10505 \begin_layout Standard
10506 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10507 list item and use the menu
10509 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10510 Start New Environment
10513 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10514 ) and behind it the new list.
10517 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10518 Start New Parent Environment
10520 only appears if the item is nested.
10521 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10525 \begin_layout Standard
10526 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10527 (red arrow in LyX).
10528 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10529 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10532 \begin_layout Standard
10533 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10536 arg "paragraph-break"
10543 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10546 \begin_layout Section
10547 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10548 \begin_inset Index idx
10551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10560 \begin_layout Standard
10561 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10562 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10564 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10565 be broken at the end of a line.
10566 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10570 \begin_layout Subsection
10572 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10574 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10579 \begin_inset Index idx
10582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10591 \begin_layout Standard
10592 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10593 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10594 ) not to break the line at
10596 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10599 \begin_layout Quote
10600 Further documentation is given in section
10601 \begin_inset Newline newline
10605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10607 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10615 \begin_layout Standard
10616 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10631 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10640 A protected space is set with
10642 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10643 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10645 \begin_inset space ~
10653 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10659 \begin_layout Subsection
10661 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10663 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10668 \begin_inset Index idx
10671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10672 Spacing ! Horizontal
10680 \begin_layout Standard
10681 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10683 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10684 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10688 The length units are listed in Appendix
10689 \begin_inset space ~
10693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10695 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10702 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10704 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10706 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10711 \begin_inset Index idx
10714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10715 Spaces ! Inter-word
10723 \begin_layout Standard
10724 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10725 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10726 at the ends of sentences.
10727 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10728 automatically takes care about this.
10729 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10730 followed by a period; see section
10731 \begin_inset space ~
10735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10737 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10742 To insert a normal space, select
10744 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10745 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10747 \begin_inset space ~
10755 arg "space-insert normal"
10761 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10763 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10765 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10770 \begin_inset Index idx
10773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10782 \begin_layout Standard
10784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10791 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10800 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10801 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10802 inside abbreviations:
10805 \begin_layout Quote
10807 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10811 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10814 \begin_layout Standard
10815 or between values and units.
10816 Compare for example this:
10817 \begin_inset Newline newline
10821 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10825 \begin_inset Newline newline
10828 10 kg (normal space
10831 \begin_layout Standard
10832 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10834 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10835 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10837 \begin_inset space ~
10845 arg "space-insert thin"
10851 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10855 \begin_layout Standard
10856 You can also insert the following space types:
10859 \begin_layout Description
10861 \begin_inset space ~
10865 \begin_inset space ~
10868 space A line with a
10869 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10873 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10877 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10880 negative thin space between the arrows.
10883 \begin_layout Description
10885 \begin_inset space ~
10889 \begin_inset space ~
10892 space A line with a
10893 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10897 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10901 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10904 negative medium space between the arrows.
10907 \begin_layout Description
10909 \begin_inset space ~
10913 \begin_inset space ~
10916 space A line with a
10917 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10921 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10925 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10928 negative thick space between the arrows.
10931 \begin_layout Description
10933 \begin_inset space ~
10937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10941 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10945 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10949 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10953 \begin_inset space ~
10957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10960 em) space between the arrows.
10963 \begin_layout Description
10965 \begin_inset space ~
10969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10973 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10977 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10981 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10985 \begin_inset space ~
10989 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10992 em) space between the arrows.
10995 \begin_layout Description
10997 \begin_inset space ~
11001 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11005 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11009 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11013 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11017 \begin_inset space ~
11021 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11024 em) space between the arrows.
11027 \begin_layout Description
11029 \begin_inset space ~
11033 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11037 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11042 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11046 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11049 cm space between the arrows.
11052 \begin_layout Standard
11054 \begin_inset space ~
11058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11060 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11064 lists the different space sizes.
11067 \begin_layout Standard
11068 \begin_inset Float table
11073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11074 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11077 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11079 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11083 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11093 \begin_inset Tabular
11094 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11095 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11096 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11097 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11185 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11213 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11241 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11265 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11280 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11308 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11336 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11349 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11370 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11372 \begin_inset Index idx
11375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11384 \begin_layout Standard
11385 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11386 feature for adding extra space
11387 in a uniform fashion.
11388 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11389 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11390 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11391 equally between themselves.
11394 \begin_layout Standard
11395 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11398 \begin_layout Quote
11400 This is on the left side
11401 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11404 This is on the right
11407 \begin_layout Quote
11410 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11414 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11420 \begin_layout Quote
11423 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11427 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11431 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11437 \begin_layout Standard
11438 That was an example in the
11444 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11448 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11452 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11455 is one in a standard paragraph.
11456 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11460 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11463 \begin_layout Standard
11464 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11467 \begin_inset space ~
11472 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11475 \begin_layout Standard
11477 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11481 \begin_inset space ~
11487 \begin_layout Standard
11489 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11493 \begin_inset space ~
11499 \begin_layout Standard
11501 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11505 \begin_inset space ~
11511 \begin_layout Standard
11513 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11517 \begin_inset space ~
11523 \begin_layout Standard
11525 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11529 \begin_inset space ~
11535 \begin_layout Standard
11537 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11541 \begin_inset space ~
11547 \begin_layout Standard
11548 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11556 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11560 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11562 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11563 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11567 option in the space dialog.
11575 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11577 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11579 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11584 \begin_inset Index idx
11587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11596 \begin_layout Standard
11597 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11598 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11601 \begin_layout Standard
11602 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11605 What is correct English?:
11606 \begin_inset Newline newline
11610 \begin_inset Newline newline
11614 \begin_inset space ~
11617 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11618 \begin_inset Newline newline
11622 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11633 \begin_inset Newline newline
11637 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11648 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11654 \begin_layout Standard
11656 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11661 \begin_inset space ~
11665 \begin_inset space ~
11669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11673 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11675 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11676 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11680 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11686 \begin_inset space ~
11690 \begin_inset space ~
11694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11697 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11706 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11707 That is why it is named
11708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11716 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11717 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11721 \begin_layout Subsection
11723 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11725 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11730 \begin_inset Index idx
11733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11742 \begin_layout Standard
11743 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11745 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11746 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11748 \begin_inset space ~
11754 There you find the following sizes:
11757 \begin_layout Standard
11770 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11771 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11776 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11778 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11779 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11781 \begin_inset space ~
11787 \begin_inset Index idx
11790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11791 Document ! Settings
11796 for the paragraph separation.
11797 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11808 \begin_layout Standard
11814 \begin_inset Index idx
11817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11823 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11824 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11829 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11830 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11839 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11848 s are described in section
11849 \begin_inset space ~
11853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11855 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11864 If there are several
11868 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11869 You can therefore use
11873 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11876 \begin_layout Standard
11881 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11882 \begin_inset space ~
11886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11888 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11895 \begin_layout Standard
11896 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11906 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11907 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11919 \begin_layout Subsection
11920 Paragraph Alignment
11921 \begin_inset Index idx
11924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11925 Paragraph ! Alignment
11933 \begin_layout Standard
11934 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11936 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11939 dialog (toolbar button
11942 arg "layout-paragraph"
11946 There are five possibilities:
11949 \begin_layout Itemize
11957 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11963 \begin_layout Itemize
11971 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11977 \begin_layout Itemize
11985 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11991 \begin_layout Itemize
11999 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12005 \begin_layout Itemize
12013 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12019 \begin_layout Standard
12020 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12021 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12022 the left and right margins.
12023 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12026 \begin_layout Standard
12028 This paragraph is right aligned,
12031 \begin_layout Standard
12033 this one is centered,
12036 \begin_layout Standard
12038 this one is left aligned.
12041 \begin_layout Subsection
12043 \begin_inset Index idx
12046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12047 Page breaks ! Forced
12053 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12055 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12062 \begin_layout Standard
12063 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12064 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12065 force a page break where you want one.
12066 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12067 is good at page breaking.
12068 Only if you use a lot of
12072 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12073 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12076 \begin_layout Standard
12077 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12078 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12082 have to change the page breaking.
12085 \begin_layout Standard
12086 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12088 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12090 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12091 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12093 \begin_inset space ~
12099 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12101 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12102 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12104 \begin_inset space ~
12109 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12111 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12112 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12115 \begin_layout Standard
12116 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12117 at the top of a page.
12118 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12120 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12121 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12122 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12126 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12130 to learn more about
12137 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12141 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12146 \begin_inset Index idx
12149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12150 Page breaks ! Clear
12158 \begin_layout Standard
12159 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12160 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12161 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12162 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12163 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12166 \begin_layout Standard
12167 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12169 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12170 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12172 \begin_inset space ~
12178 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12180 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12181 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12183 \begin_inset space ~
12187 \begin_inset space ~
12192 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12193 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12196 \begin_layout Subsection
12198 \begin_inset Index idx
12201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12208 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12210 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12217 \begin_layout Standard
12218 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12220 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12222 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12223 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12225 \begin_inset space ~
12229 \begin_inset space ~
12237 arg "newline-insert newline"
12241 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12243 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12244 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12246 \begin_inset space ~
12250 \begin_inset space ~
12258 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12261 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12263 This is useful to avoid
12264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12271 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12274 \begin_layout Standard
12275 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12276 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12278 very good at line breaking.
12279 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12280 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12281 \begin_inset space ~
12285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12287 reference "sec:Quote"
12292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12294 reference "sec:Verse"
12299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12301 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12308 \begin_layout Subsection
12310 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12312 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12317 \begin_inset Index idx
12320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12329 \begin_layout Standard
12331 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12342 \begin_layout Standard
12346 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12347 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12349 \begin_inset space ~
12354 you can insert horizontal lines.
12355 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12356 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12357 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12360 \begin_layout Standard
12362 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12373 \begin_layout Section
12374 Characters and Symbols
12377 \begin_layout Standard
12378 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12379 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12380 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12382 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12388 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12392 for information on how this is done.
12395 \begin_layout Standard
12396 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12401 dialog via the menu
12403 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12404 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12410 \begin_layout Standard
12411 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12419 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12420 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12422 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12430 \begin_layout Section
12431 Fonts and Text Styles
12432 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12434 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12441 \begin_layout Subsection
12443 \begin_inset Index idx
12446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12455 \begin_layout Standard
12456 There are two types of fonts:
12459 \begin_layout Description
12461 \begin_inset space ~
12465 \begin_inset Index idx
12468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12474 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12475 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12479 characters) in the font.
12480 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12481 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12482 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12483 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12484 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12485 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12486 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12487 \begin_inset Newline newline
12490 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12491 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12492 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12493 sizes than at small ones.
12494 \begin_inset Newline newline
12508 \begin_inset space ~
12516 \begin_layout Description
12518 \begin_inset space ~
12522 \begin_inset Index idx
12525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12531 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12532 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12533 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12534 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12535 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12536 image manipulation program.
12537 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12538 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12539 \begin_inset space ~
12542 pixels high up to 34
12543 \begin_inset space ~
12546 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12547 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12548 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12550 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12551 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12552 \begin_inset Newline newline
12555 Bitmap fonts are named
12558 \begin_inset space ~
12563 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12566 \begin_layout Standard
12567 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12568 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12569 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12570 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12571 use scalable fonts.
12574 \begin_layout Standard
12575 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12578 \begin_layout Standard
12579 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12580 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12581 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12582 font to emphasize text, you use an
12583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12591 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12593 In \SpecialChar LyX
12594 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12598 \begin_layout Subsection
12601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12603 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12610 \begin_layout Standard
12611 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12612 used its own fonts.
12613 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12614 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12617 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12618 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12619 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12620 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12621 to a word processor.
12622 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12623 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12624 files are very portable across
12625 different machines.
12626 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12627 has increased a lot
12628 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12631 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12633 \begin_inset space ~
12637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12639 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12644 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12645 code in the document
12646 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12649 \begin_layout Standard
12650 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12651 engines that are also able directly
12652 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12654 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12656 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12658 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12659 that is installed on your system.
12660 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12663 \begin_layout Standard
12664 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12672 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12673 es; so you might have to experiment.
12681 \begin_layout Subsection
12682 Document Font and Font size
12683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12685 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12690 \begin_inset Index idx
12693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12700 \begin_inset Index idx
12703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12712 \begin_layout Standard
12713 You can set the document fonts in the
12715 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12719 \begin_inset Index idx
12722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12723 Document ! Settings
12733 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12734 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12737 \begin_inset space ~
12746 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12748 \begin_inset space ~
12751 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12754 \begin_layout Standard
12759 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12760 This requires that you use
12772 as the output format, i.
12773 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12777 \begin_inset space \space{}
12780 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12781 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12782 installed (see section
12783 \begin_inset space ~
12787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12789 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12794 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12796 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12797 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12799 \begin_inset space ~
12802 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12803 cannot determine the family.
12804 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12805 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12808 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12811 \begin_layout Standard
12812 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12813 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12818 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12824 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12825 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12833 \begin_inset space ~
12839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12852 European Computer Modern
12855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12862 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12865 \begin_layout Standard
12874 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12875 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12880 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12883 \begin_inset space ~
12888 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12894 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12895 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12898 \begin_layout Itemize
12902 \begin_inset space ~
12907 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12920 \begin_inset space ~
12925 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12926 community in order to replace
12930 as the default font.
12931 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12932 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12935 \begin_inset space ~
12948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12949 One difference is improved kerning.
12957 \begin_layout Itemize
12961 \begin_inset space ~
12965 \begin_inset space ~
12970 fonts in (the rare) case that
12973 \begin_inset space ~
12978 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12993 Virtual means that it
12994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13005 -glyphs from other fonts.
13006 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13028 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13034 \begin_inset Index idx
13037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13039 -packages ! aeguill
13044 with the document preamble line
13045 \begin_inset Newline newline
13052 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13053 \begin_inset Newline newline
13058 will fix the guillemet problem.
13063 and that accented characters are not
13067 glyph, but built of
13071 characters, the accent and the letter.
13072 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13078 If you search for example for the French word
13079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13086 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13095 and not for the glyph
13096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13100 \begin_inset space ~
13104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13110 \begin_layout Itemize
13111 If you do not like the look of
13119 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13120 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13124 \begin_inset space ~
13130 \begin_inset space ~
13140 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13141 \begin_inset space ~
13144 serif and typewriter fonts,
13148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13149 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13150 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13156 \begin_inset space ~
13165 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13166 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13170 \begin_inset space \space{}
13178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13182 \begin_inset space \space{}
13188 \begin_inset space ~
13196 \begin_inset space ~
13206 but you can also select your own.
13207 \begin_inset Newline newline
13210 The differences between roman,
13213 \begin_inset space ~
13222 fonts are explained in section
13223 \begin_inset space ~
13227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13229 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13234 \begin_inset Newline newline
13240 \begin_inset space ~
13245 was originally designed for newspapers.
13246 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13247 into the small newspaper columns.
13251 \begin_inset space ~
13256 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13259 \begin_layout Standard
13260 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13273 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13278 depends on the class you are using.
13279 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13282 \begin_layout Standard
13283 Note that the font size is the
13288 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13289 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13290 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13291 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13294 \begin_inset space ~
13300 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13301 \begin_inset space ~
13305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13307 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13314 \begin_layout Standard
13318 \begin_inset space ~
13323 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13325 \begin_inset space ~
13328 serif or typewriter.
13333 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13343 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13346 \begin_layout Standard
13351 LaTeX font encoding
13353 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13354 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13360 \begin_inset Index idx
13363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13365 -packages ! fontenc
13371 \begin_inset space ~
13375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13377 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13382 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13383 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13390 \begin_layout Standard
13391 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13393 Use Old Style Figures
13397 Use True Small Caps
13400 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13403 Use Old Style Figures
13405 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13407 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13412 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13415 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13419 Use True Small Caps
13421 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13422 of scaled capitals.
13423 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13424 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13427 \begin_layout Standard
13432 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13433 a font to display the script characters.
13437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13438 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13444 \begin_inset Index idx
13447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13454 So this has no effect for the document language
13468 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13472 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13480 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13485 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13486 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13488 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13490 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13493 dialog, see section
13494 \begin_inset space ~
13498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13500 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13512 \begin_layout Subsection
13516 \begin_layout Standard
13517 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13518 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13520 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13521 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13522 choose a math font in the dialog
13524 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13528 \begin_inset Index idx
13531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13532 Document ! Settings
13538 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13539 automatically selects a math font.
13540 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13541 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13550 \begin_inset space ~
13556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13561 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13562 document font is available.
13565 \begin_layout Standard
13566 Note that the math font will not be used for
13570 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13576 or by the insertion of the command
13583 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13584 \begin_inset space ~
13588 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13589 while the math characters do not.
13591 \begin_inset space ~
13594 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13597 \begin_inset space ~
13605 \begin_inset space ~
13610 in the document font settings.
13613 \begin_layout Standard
13614 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13615 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13616 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13617 font (in most cases
13618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13624 \begin_inset space ~
13630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13633 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13634 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13642 \begin_inset space ~
13648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13654 \begin_layout Subsection
13655 Using Different Character Styles
13656 \begin_inset Index idx
13659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13666 \begin_inset Index idx
13669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13678 \begin_layout Standard
13679 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13680 automatically changes the character style for certain
13681 paragraph environments.
13683 supports two character styles,
13692 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13696 \begin_layout Standard
13701 style, do one of the following:
13704 \begin_layout Itemize
13705 click on the toolbar button
13714 \begin_layout Itemize
13715 use the key binding
13724 \begin_layout Standard
13725 These commands are all toggles.
13730 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13733 \begin_layout Standard
13734 One typically uses the
13738 style for proper names.
13740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13747 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13755 \begin_layout Standard
13756 A more widely used character style is the
13761 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13768 \begin_layout Itemize
13769 clicking on the toolbar button
13778 \begin_layout Itemize
13779 using the keybindings
13788 \begin_layout Standard
13793 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13795 use a different font.
13798 \begin_layout Standard
13799 We've been using the
13803 style all over the place in this document.
13804 Here's one more example:
13807 \begin_layout Quotation
13810 Do not overuse character styles!
13813 \begin_layout Standard
13814 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13815 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13816 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13817 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13821 \begin_layout Standard
13822 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13830 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13832 \begin_inset space ~
13835 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13841 arg "dialog-show character"
13847 \begin_layout Subsection
13848 Fine-Tuning with the
13853 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13855 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13860 \begin_inset Index idx
13863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13872 \begin_layout Standard
13873 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13875 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13876 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13877 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13878 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13879 from ordinary dialog.
13882 \begin_layout Standard
13883 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13884 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13885 \begin_inset Newline newline
13888 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13889 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13892 \begin_layout Standard
13893 To use custom character styles, open the
13895 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13897 \begin_inset space ~
13900 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13903 dialog or press the toolbar button
13906 arg "dialog-show character"
13910 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13911 font property that you can choose.
13912 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13915 \begin_inset space ~
13920 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13925 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13926 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13927 environments all at once.
13930 \begin_layout Standard
13931 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13934 \begin_inset space ~
13946 \begin_layout Labeling
13947 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13961 The possible options are:
13965 \begin_layout Labeling
13966 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13971 This is the Roman font family.
13972 Normally a serif font.
13973 It's also the default family.
13983 \begin_layout Labeling
13984 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13988 \begin_inset space ~
13995 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14007 \begin_layout Labeling
14008 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14015 This is the Typewriter font family.
14021 arg "font-typewriter"
14030 \begin_layout Labeling
14031 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14036 This corresponds to the print weight.
14041 \begin_layout Labeling
14042 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14047 This is the Medium font series.
14048 It's also the default series.
14051 \begin_layout Labeling
14052 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14059 This is the Bold font series.
14072 \begin_layout Labeling
14073 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14078 As the name implies.
14083 \begin_layout Labeling
14084 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14089 This is the Upright font shape.
14090 It's also the default shape.
14093 \begin_layout Labeling
14094 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14108 s the Italic font shape
14114 \begin_layout Labeling
14115 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14122 This is the Slanted font shape
14124 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14125 , this is different from italic).
14128 \begin_layout Labeling
14129 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14133 \begin_inset space ~
14140 This is the Small caps font shape
14147 \begin_layout Labeling
14148 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14153 Alters the text color.
14154 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14158 \begin_inset space ~
14163 , which means that the document default color set in
14165 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14166 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14172 \begin_inset space ~
14177 is used, you can choose between
14254 \begin_inset Index idx
14257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14266 \begin_layout Labeling
14267 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14272 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14273 the language of the document.
14274 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14275 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14277 \begin_inset Newline newline
14280 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14282 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14283 When using the spell checking (see section
14284 \begin_inset space ~
14288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14290 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14294 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14297 \begin_layout Labeling
14298 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14303 Alters the size of the font.
14304 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14305 proportional to the document font size.
14306 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14307 the details, but a general description of what
14313 \begin_layout Labeling
14314 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14335 arg "font-size tiny"
14341 \begin_layout Labeling
14342 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14363 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14369 \begin_layout Labeling
14370 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14391 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14397 \begin_layout Labeling
14398 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14419 arg "font-size small"
14425 \begin_layout Labeling
14426 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14440 It's also the default size.
14444 arg "font-size normal"
14450 \begin_layout Labeling
14451 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14472 arg "font-size large"
14478 \begin_layout Labeling
14479 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14500 arg "font-size larger"
14506 \begin_layout Labeling
14507 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14528 arg "font-size largest"
14534 \begin_layout Labeling
14535 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14556 arg "font-size huge"
14562 \begin_layout Labeling
14563 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14584 arg "font-size giant"
14590 \begin_layout Labeling
14591 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14596 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14616 arg "font-size increase"
14622 \begin_layout Labeling
14623 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14628 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14648 arg "font-size decrease"
14655 \begin_layout Standard
14660 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14661 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14663 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14664 — use those instead.
14665 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14668 \begin_layout Labeling
14669 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14674 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14679 \begin_layout Labeling
14680 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14687 This is text with emphasize on
14690 This might seem like the same as
14694 , but it is actually a bit different.
14700 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14702 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14705 \begin_layout Labeling
14706 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14713 This is text with Underbar on.
14719 arg "font-underline"
14725 \begin_inset Newline newline
14730 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14731 when you could not change fonts.
14732 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14733 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14734 because some people
14738 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14741 \begin_layout Labeling
14742 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14746 \begin_inset space ~
14753 This is text with Double underbar on.
14759 arg "font-underunderline"
14763 \begin_inset Newline newline
14766 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14767 about double underbar.
14770 \begin_layout Labeling
14771 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14775 \begin_inset space ~
14782 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14788 arg "font-underwave"
14792 \begin_inset Newline newline
14795 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14796 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14799 \begin_layout Labeling
14800 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14807 This is text with Strikeout on.
14813 arg "font-strikeout"
14817 \begin_inset Newline newline
14820 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14821 changed in the meantime.
14824 \begin_layout Labeling
14825 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14832 This is text with Noun on.
14839 , this is a logical attribute.
14840 Normally it's equivalent to
14843 \begin_inset space ~
14852 \begin_layout Standard
14853 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14854 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14856 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14858 \begin_inset space ~
14861 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14867 arg "dialog-show character"
14870 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14871 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14874 arg "textstyle-apply"
14878 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14882 \begin_layout Standard
14883 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14890 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14891 (suppose you just set the shape to
14892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14910 \begin_inset space ~
14922 \begin_layout Standard
14923 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14931 \begin_inset space ~
14943 \begin_layout Itemize
14949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14956 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14974 \begin_inset Newline newline
14978 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14992 \begin_inset Note Note
14995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14996 For more on phantoms see section
14997 \begin_inset space ~
15001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15003 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15013 \begin_inset Newline newline
15019 \begin_layout Itemize
15024 fonts use characters with serifs.
15025 These are the small
15026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15033 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15034 The following example shows the difference:
15035 \begin_inset Newline newline
15039 \begin_inset Newline newline
15044 text without serifs
15047 \begin_inset Newline newline
15050 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15051 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15058 \begin_layout Itemize
15063 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15064 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15065 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15068 \begin_layout Standard
15069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15076 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15077 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15080 \begin_inset space ~
15085 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15086 the property to be removed.
15087 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15088 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15089 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15107 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15108 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15116 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15120 \begin_inset space ~
15125 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15136 If you, for example, set
15137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15155 \begin_inset space ~
15160 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15169 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15172 \begin_layout Standard
15173 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15174 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15177 \begin_layout Section
15178 Printing and Previewing
15181 \begin_layout Subsection
15185 \begin_layout Standard
15186 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15187 using \SpecialChar LyX
15188 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15189 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15190 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15191 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15193 Additional Features
15198 \begin_layout Standard
15200 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15203 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15204 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15205 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15208 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15209 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15210 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15211 to turn your writing into printable output.
15212 This happens in two stages:
15215 \begin_layout Enumerate
15216 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15217 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15219 a file with the extension,
15220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15234 \begin_layout Enumerate
15235 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15236 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15237 to use the commands in the
15241 file to produce printable output.
15244 \begin_layout Subsection
15245 Output file formats
15246 \begin_inset Index idx
15249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15256 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15258 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15265 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15266 Simple text (ASCII)
15267 \begin_inset Index idx
15270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15271 File formats ! ASCII
15279 \begin_layout Standard
15280 This file type has the extension
15281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15293 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15297 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15304 \begin_layout Standard
15305 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15307 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15308 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15310 \begin_inset space ~
15316 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15317 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15318 bibliography (section
15319 \begin_inset space ~
15323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15325 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15330 If your document includes such material, use
15332 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15333 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15335 \begin_inset space ~
15339 \begin_inset space ~
15343 \begin_inset space ~
15351 \begin_inset space ~
15355 \begin_inset space ~
15361 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15362 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15365 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15368 \begin_inset Index idx
15371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15372 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15381 \begin_layout Standard
15382 This file type has the extension
15383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15394 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15397 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15398 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15399 -Errors or to process it manually
15400 with console commands.
15401 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15402 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15403 's temporary directory whenever you
15404 view or export your document.
15407 \begin_layout Standard
15408 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15409 -file using the menu
15411 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15412 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15416 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15417 export variants are explained in section
15418 \begin_inset space ~
15422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15424 reference "subsec:Export"
15431 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15433 \begin_inset Index idx
15436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15445 \begin_layout Standard
15446 This file type has the extension
15447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15467 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15468 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15469 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15473 \begin_layout Standard
15474 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15475 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15476 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15477 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15478 when you view the DVI.
15479 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15482 \begin_layout Standard
15483 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15485 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15486 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15491 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15492 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15494 \begin_inset space ~
15500 The latter option uses the program
15502 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15508 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15511 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15512 font access (see section
15513 \begin_inset space ~
15517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15519 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15524 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15525 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15530 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15532 \begin_inset Index idx
15535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15536 File formats ! PostScript
15544 \begin_layout Standard
15545 This file type has the extension
15546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15558 PostScript was developed by the company
15562 as a printer language.
15563 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15565 PostScript can be seen as a
15566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15569 programming language
15570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15573 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15578 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15585 \begin_inset Index idx
15588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15590 -packages ! pstricks
15600 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15603 \begin_layout Standard
15604 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15608 Encapsulated PostScript
15609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15612 (EPS, file extension
15613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15625 As \SpecialChar LyX
15626 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15627 convert them in the background to EPS.
15628 If, for example, you have 50
15629 \begin_inset space ~
15632 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15634 \begin_inset space ~
15637 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15638 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15640 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15641 EPS to avoid this problem.
15644 \begin_layout Standard
15645 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15647 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15648 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15654 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15656 \begin_inset Index idx
15659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15666 \begin_inset Index idx
15669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15678 \begin_layout Standard
15679 This file type has the extension
15680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15696 Portable Document Format
15697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15704 was derived from PostScript.
15705 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15714 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15715 looks exactly the same.
15718 \begin_layout Standard
15719 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15723 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15727 (JPG, file extension
15728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15755 Portable Network Graphics
15756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15759 (PNG, file extension
15760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15772 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15773 converts them in the
15774 background to one of these formats.
15775 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15776 will slow down your workflow.
15777 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15780 \begin_layout Standard
15781 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15783 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15789 \begin_layout Description
15791 \begin_inset space ~
15794 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15798 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15801 \begin_layout Description
15803 \begin_inset space ~
15810 ) This uses the program
15812 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15815 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15818 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15821 is a new engine, derived from
15825 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15826 access (see section
15827 \begin_inset space ~
15831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15833 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15838 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15839 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15844 \begin_layout Description
15846 \begin_inset space ~
15853 ) This uses the program
15858 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15864 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15865 font access (see section
15866 \begin_inset space ~
15870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15872 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15877 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15878 vertically written Japanese.
15881 \begin_layout Description
15883 \begin_inset space ~
15886 (cropped) This is the same as
15889 \begin_inset space ~
15894 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15895 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15896 to generate good-looking
15897 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15900 \begin_layout Description
15902 \begin_inset space ~
15905 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15909 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15913 \begin_layout Description
15915 \begin_inset space ~
15918 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15922 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15923 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15927 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15928 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15931 \begin_layout Standard
15935 \begin_inset space ~
15944 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15945 works without problems.
15946 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15947 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15951 \begin_inset space ~
15959 \begin_inset space ~
15964 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15972 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15974 \begin_inset Index idx
15977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15978 FileFormats ! XHTML
15984 \begin_inset Index idx
15987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15996 \begin_layout Standard
15997 This file type has the extension
15998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16010 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16011 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16012 When \SpecialChar LyX
16013 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16014 suitable for the purpose.
16015 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16017 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16018 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16021 between different formats, which are described in section
16023 Math Output in XHTML
16028 \begin_inset space ~
16036 \begin_layout Standard
16037 XHTML output remains
16038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16045 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16046 features are supported yet.
16050 and the World Wide Web
16054 Additional Features
16056 manual, for more information.
16059 \begin_layout Standard
16060 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16062 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16063 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16069 \begin_layout Subsection
16071 \begin_inset Index idx
16074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16083 \begin_layout Standard
16084 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16085 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16094 or use the toolbar button
16101 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16102 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16103 \begin_inset space ~
16107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16109 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16113 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16115 \begin_inset space ~
16119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16121 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16126 Further output formats can be selected via
16128 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16129 View (Other Formats)
16131 or the toolbar button
16140 \begin_layout Standard
16141 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16142 viewer window using the menu
16144 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16149 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16150 Update (Other Formats)
16155 \begin_layout Standard
16156 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16159 To have a real output, export your document.
16162 \begin_layout Section
16163 A few Words about Typography
16164 \begin_inset Index idx
16167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16176 \begin_layout Subsection
16177 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16178 \begin_inset Index idx
16181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16188 \begin_inset Index idx
16191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16200 \begin_layout Standard
16201 In \SpecialChar LyX
16203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16214 character comes in four lengths: the
16226 , and the minus sign:
16227 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16233 \begin_layout Standard
16234 \begin_inset Tabular
16235 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16236 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16237 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16238 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16239 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16240 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16269 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16309 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16334 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16336 \begin_inset space ~
16339 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16346 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16371 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16373 \begin_inset space ~
16376 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16397 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16431 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16437 \begin_layout Standard
16438 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16450 character multiple times in a row.
16451 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16452 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16459 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16471 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16475 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16485 \begin_layout Standard
16486 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16487 math mode and has a length of its own.
16488 Here are some examples:
16491 \begin_layout Enumerate
16492 line- and page-breaks
16493 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16503 \begin_layout Enumerate
16505 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16515 \begin_layout Enumerate
16516 Oh — there's a dash.
16517 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16527 \begin_layout Enumerate
16528 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16532 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16542 \begin_layout Subsection
16544 \begin_inset Index idx
16547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16554 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16556 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16563 \begin_layout Standard
16564 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16565 but automatically in the output.
16566 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16572 \begin_inset Index idx
16575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16582 following the rules of the document language.
16585 \begin_layout Standard
16587 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16591 font and with unusual constructs, like
16592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16600 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16601 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16602 This is done with the menu
16604 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16605 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16607 \begin_inset space ~
16613 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16615 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16619 \begin_layout Standard
16620 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16621 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16632 would then see the hyphen
16633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16640 as a hyphenation possibility.
16641 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16642 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16643 as described in section
16645 Prevent Hyphenation
16650 \begin_inset space ~
16658 \begin_layout Subsection
16660 \begin_inset Index idx
16663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16672 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16673 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16674 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16676 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16683 \begin_layout Standard
16684 When \SpecialChar LyX
16685 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16686 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16688 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16694 appropriate amount of space.
16695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16698 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16700 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16701 gets after another word.
16704 \begin_layout Standard
16705 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16706 not work in all cases.
16708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16719 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16720 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16723 \begin_layout Standard
16724 Here are some examples of
16728 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16731 \begin_layout Itemize
16736 \begin_layout Itemize
16741 \begin_layout Standard
16742 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16745 \begin_layout Itemize
16747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16751 this is too much space!
16754 \begin_layout Itemize
16759 \begin_layout Standard
16760 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16763 \begin_layout Standard
16764 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16767 \begin_layout Enumerate
16771 \begin_inset space ~
16776 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16777 \begin_inset space ~
16781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16783 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16788 \begin_inset Index idx
16791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16792 Spaces ! inter-word
16800 \begin_layout Enumerate
16804 \begin_inset space ~
16809 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16810 \begin_inset space ~
16814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16816 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16821 \begin_inset Index idx
16824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16833 \begin_layout Enumerate
16837 \begin_inset space ~
16841 \begin_inset space ~
16845 \begin_inset space ~
16852 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16854 \begin_inset space ~
16859 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16860 This function is also bound to
16863 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16869 \begin_layout Standard
16870 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16873 \begin_layout Itemize
16875 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16879 \begin_inset space \space{}
16882 this is too much space!
16885 \begin_layout Itemize
16886 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16890 \begin_layout Standard
16891 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16892 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16894 will take care of this.
16897 \begin_layout Standard
16898 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16902 \begin_inset space ~
16908 feature described in the section
16910 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16915 Additional Features
16920 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16922 \begin_inset Index idx
16925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16926 Typography ! Quotes
16932 \begin_inset Index idx
16935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16966 \begin_layout Standard
16968 usually sets quotes correctly.
16969 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16970 and use a closing quote at the end.
16972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16980 The keyboard character,
16984 , generates this automatically.
16987 \begin_layout Standard
16988 You can specify what character the
16992 key produces using the submenu
16998 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17002 \begin_inset Index idx
17005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17006 Document ! Settings
17016 There are six choices:
17019 \begin_layout Labeling
17020 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17043 \begin_layout Labeling
17044 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17047 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17051 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17056 Use quotes like ”this”
17059 \begin_layout Labeling
17060 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17063 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17067 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17073 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17077 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17083 \begin_layout Labeling
17084 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17087 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17091 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17097 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17101 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17107 \begin_layout Labeling
17108 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17111 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17115 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17121 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17125 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17131 \begin_layout Labeling
17132 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17135 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17139 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17145 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17149 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17155 \begin_layout Standard
17156 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
17159 arg "quote-insert single"
17165 \begin_layout Subsection
17167 \begin_inset Index idx
17170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17171 Typography ! Ligatures
17177 \begin_inset Index idx
17180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17209 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17211 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17218 \begin_layout Standard
17219 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17220 print them as single characters.
17221 These groups are known as
17226 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17227 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17229 Here are the standard ligatures:
17232 \begin_layout Itemize
17236 \begin_layout Itemize
17240 \begin_layout Itemize
17244 \begin_layout Itemize
17248 \begin_layout Itemize
17252 \begin_layout Standard
17253 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17256 \begin_layout Standard
17257 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17258 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17266 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17282 To break a ligature, use
17284 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17285 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17287 \begin_inset space ~
17294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17305 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17322 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17330 \begin_layout Subsection
17332 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17334 \begin_inset Index idx
17337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17347 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17354 \begin_layout Standard
17357 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17358 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
17362 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17365 \begin_layout Description
17367 The name of the game.
17370 \begin_layout Description
17372 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17376 \begin_layout Description
17378 The \SpecialChar TeX
17379 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
17383 \begin_layout Description
17384 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17385 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17389 \begin_layout Standard
17390 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17396 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17404 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17405 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17406 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17407 converges to the number
17408 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17411 : The actual version is
17412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17420 , the previous one was
17421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17432 \begin_layout Subsection
17434 \begin_inset Index idx
17437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17446 \begin_layout Standard
17447 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17448 space between two words.
17449 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17459 for units use the menu
17461 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17462 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17464 \begin_inset space ~
17472 arg "space-insert thin"
17478 \begin_layout Standard
17479 Here is an example to show the differences:
17482 \begin_layout Standard
17483 \begin_inset Tabular
17484 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17485 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17486 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17487 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17494 \begin_inset space ~
17498 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17510 space between number and unit
17517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17526 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17538 half space between number and unit
17551 \begin_layout Subsection
17553 \begin_inset Index idx
17556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17557 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17565 \begin_layout Standard
17566 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17568 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17569 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17570 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17571 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17572 These bits of text became known as
17583 \begin_layout Standard
17584 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17585 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17586 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17587 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17588 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17589 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17590 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17591 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17592 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17593 \begin_inset Newline newline
17601 \begin_inset Newline newline
17609 \begin_inset Newline newline
17612 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17613 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17614 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17616 \begin_inset space ~
17620 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17622 key "latexcompanion"
17627 \begin_inset space ~
17631 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17637 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17638 's page break mechanism.
17641 \begin_layout Chapter
17642 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17645 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17652 \begin_layout Standard
17653 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17656 \begin_inset space ~
17662 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17665 \begin_layout Section
17667 \begin_inset Index idx
17670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17677 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17686 \begin_layout Standard
17688 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17691 \begin_layout Description
17694 \begin_inset space ~
17697 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17698 \begin_inset Newline newline
17702 \begin_inset Note Note
17705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17706 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17714 \begin_layout Description
17715 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17716 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17717 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17720 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17721 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17723 \begin_inset space ~
17729 \begin_inset Newline newline
17733 \begin_inset Note Comment
17736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17737 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17746 \begin_layout Description
17748 \begin_inset space ~
17751 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17752 set in the document settings under
17754 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17756 \begin_inset space ~
17762 \begin_inset Newline newline
17766 \begin_inset Newline newline
17770 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17779 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17780 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17785 of a comment that appears in the output.
17791 \begin_inset Newline newline
17795 \begin_inset Newline newline
17798 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17801 \begin_layout Standard
17802 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17810 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17814 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17817 \begin_layout Section
17819 \begin_inset Index idx
17822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17829 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17831 name "sec:Footnotes"
17838 \begin_layout Standard
17840 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17843 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17846 or the toolbar button
17849 arg "footnote-insert"
17861 \begin_inset Graphics
17862 filename clipart/footnote.png
17871 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17872 's representation of your footnote.
17882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17901 label, the box will
17905 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17906 Clicking on the box label again will close
17919 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17920 and click on the footnote
17935 \begin_layout Standard
17936 Here is an example footnote:
17944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17945 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17953 \begin_layout Standard
17954 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17955 position where the footnote box is placed.
17956 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17957 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17958 according to the document class.
17960 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
17961 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17967 ey are described in the
17970 \begin_inset space ~
17978 \begin_layout Section
17980 \begin_inset Index idx
17983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17990 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17992 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17999 \begin_layout Standard
18000 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
18002 When you insert a margin note via the menu
18004 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18006 \begin_inset space ~
18011 or the toolbar button
18014 arg "marginalnote-insert"
18033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18040 appearing within your text.
18041 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18042 's representation of your margin
18051 \begin_layout Standard
18052 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
18056 \begin_inset Marginal
18059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18061 This is a marginal note.
18069 \begin_layout Standard
18070 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
18071 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
18072 pages, right on odd pages.
18075 \begin_layout Standard
18076 For further information about marginal notes see the section
18079 \begin_inset space ~
18087 \begin_inset space ~
18095 \begin_layout Section
18096 Graphics and Images
18097 \begin_inset Index idx
18100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18107 \begin_inset Index idx
18110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18117 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18119 name "sec:Graphics"
18126 \begin_layout Standard
18127 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18128 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18131 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18136 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18140 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18143 \begin_layout Standard
18144 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18149 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18150 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18152 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18153 \begin_inset space ~
18157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18159 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18166 \begin_layout Standard
18171 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18172 of the image in the output.
18173 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18177 \begin_inset space ~
18181 \begin_inset space ~
18190 \begin_inset space ~
18194 \begin_inset space ~
18198 \begin_inset space ~
18203 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18204 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18212 \begin_layout Standard
18216 \begin_inset space ~
18220 \begin_inset space ~
18225 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18226 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18228 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18233 \begin_inset space ~
18238 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18239 with the image size is printed.
18242 \begin_layout Standard
18243 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18244 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18246 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18249 \begin_layout Standard
18251 \begin_inset Graphics
18252 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18260 \begin_layout Standard
18261 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18262 the image into a float, see section
18263 \begin_inset space ~
18267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18269 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18276 \begin_layout Subsection
18278 \begin_inset Index idx
18281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18288 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18290 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18297 \begin_layout Standard
18298 You can insert images in any known file format.
18299 But as we explained in section
18300 \begin_inset space ~
18304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18306 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18310 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18312 therefore uses the program
18316 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18317 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18318 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18319 \begin_inset space ~
18323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18325 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18332 \begin_layout Standard
18333 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18336 \begin_layout Description
18338 \begin_inset space ~
18341 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18342 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18343 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18347 Graphics Interchange Format
18348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18351 (GIF, file extension
18352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18364 \begin_inset Index idx
18367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18399 Portable Network Graphics
18400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18403 (PNG, file extension
18404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18416 \begin_inset Index idx
18419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18451 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18455 (JPG, file extension
18456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18480 \begin_inset Index idx
18483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18514 \begin_layout Description
18516 \begin_inset space ~
18519 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18521 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18522 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18523 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18524 \begin_inset Newline newline
18527 Scalable image formats can be
18528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18531 Scalable Vector Graphics
18532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18535 (SVG, file extension
18536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18548 \begin_inset Index idx
18551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18583 Encapsulated PostScript
18584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18587 (EPS, file extension
18588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18600 \begin_inset Index idx
18603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18635 Portable Document Format
18636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18639 (PDF, file extension
18640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18652 \begin_inset Index idx
18655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18670 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18671 result will not be scalable.
18672 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18678 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18686 \begin_layout Standard
18687 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18694 \begin_layout Subsection
18695 Grouping of Image Settings
18696 \begin_inset Index idx
18699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18700 Images ! Settings grouping
18708 \begin_layout Standard
18709 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18711 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18712 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18714 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18715 need to manually change each of them.
18719 \begin_layout Standard
18720 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18723 \begin_inset space ~
18727 \begin_inset space ~
18739 \begin_inset space ~
18743 \begin_inset space ~
18749 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18750 and checking the name of the desired group.
18753 \begin_layout Section
18755 \begin_inset Index idx
18758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18774 \begin_layout Standard
18775 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18778 arg "tabular-insert"
18783 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18787 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18788 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18789 from the rest of the table.
18790 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18791 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18793 Here is an example table:
18796 \begin_layout Standard
18798 \begin_inset Tabular
18799 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18800 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18801 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18802 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18803 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18804 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19004 \begin_layout Subsection
19008 \begin_layout Standard
19009 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
19012 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
19016 This brings up the table dialog.
19017 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
19018 cursor is placed currently.
19019 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
19020 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
19021 done on all of your selection.
19024 \begin_layout Standard
19025 In addition to the table dialog, the
19028 \begin_inset space ~
19033 helps you in setting table properties.
19034 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
19037 \begin_layout Standard
19041 \begin_inset space ~
19046 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19047 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19048 current cell respectively.
19049 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19051 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19052 of text, see section
19053 \begin_inset space ~
19057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19059 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
19066 \begin_layout Standard
19067 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19068 using the check box
19077 This will merge the cells to
19081 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19082 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19083 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19084 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19085 in the last row without the upper border:
19088 \begin_layout Standard
19090 \begin_inset Tabular
19091 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19092 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19093 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19094 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19095 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19096 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19107 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19116 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19192 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19227 \begin_layout Standard
19228 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19229 -arguments for the table.
19230 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19231 explained in the chapter
19238 \begin_inset space ~
19244 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19245 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19246 but are visible in the output.
19249 \begin_layout Standard
19250 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19258 Most DVI-viewers are
19262 able to display rotations.
19270 \begin_layout Standard
19275 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19280 adds lines for all cell borders.
19283 \begin_layout Subsection
19285 \begin_inset Index idx
19288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19289 Tables ! Multi-page
19295 \begin_inset Index idx
19298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19307 \begin_layout Standard
19308 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19311 \begin_inset space ~
19315 \begin_inset space ~
19323 \begin_inset space ~
19328 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19329 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19332 \begin_layout Description
19337 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19338 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19339 Except for the first page, if
19342 \begin_inset space ~
19350 \begin_layout Description
19354 \begin_inset space ~
19359 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19360 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19363 \begin_layout Description
19368 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19369 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19370 except for the last page, if
19373 \begin_inset space ~
19381 \begin_layout Description
19385 \begin_inset space ~
19390 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19391 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19394 \begin_layout Description
19395 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19396 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19398 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19402 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
19405 \begin_inset space ~
19413 \begin_layout Standard
19414 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19415 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19416 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19422 In this context, first means first in this order:
19425 \begin_inset space ~
19437 \begin_inset space ~
19442 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19445 \begin_layout Standard
19447 \begin_inset Tabular
19448 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19449 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19450 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19451 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19452 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19453 <row endfirsthead="true">
19454 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19460 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19465 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19474 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19484 <row endfirsthead="true">
19485 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19496 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19505 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19517 <row endhead="true">
19518 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19529 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19538 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19548 <row endhead="true">
19549 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19560 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19569 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19581 <row endfoot="true">
19582 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19593 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19602 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19633 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20574 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20583 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20592 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20603 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20634 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20665 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20696 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20727 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20758 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20789 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20820 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20851 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20882 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20913 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20944 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20975 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21006 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21037 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21068 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21099 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21130 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21161 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21192 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21223 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21254 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21285 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21316 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21347 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21378 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21409 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21440 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21471 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21502 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21533 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21563 <row endlastfoot="true">
21564 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21575 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21584 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21601 \begin_layout Subsection
21603 \begin_inset Index idx
21606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21613 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21615 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21622 \begin_layout Standard
21623 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21624 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21625 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21626 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21630 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21633 \begin_layout Standard
21634 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21635 for the column in the table dialog.
21636 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21637 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21641 \begin_layout Standard
21643 \begin_inset Tabular
21644 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21645 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21646 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21647 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21648 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21668 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21737 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21793 This is longer now.
21798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21849 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21850 This is longer now.
21855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21881 \begin_layout Standard
21882 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21883 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21888 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21889 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21895 Selection with the mouse or with
21899 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21900 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21901 the selection from outside the table.
21904 \begin_layout Section
21906 \begin_inset Index idx
21909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21916 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21925 \begin_layout Subsection
21929 \begin_layout Standard
21930 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21931 have a fixed location.
21933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21940 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21948 \begin_inset space ~
21953 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21954 too many notes on the current page.
21957 \begin_layout Standard
21958 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21959 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21960 and pages without text.
21961 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21962 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21963 Floats are therefore numbered.
21964 Referencing is described in section
21965 \begin_inset space ~
21969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21971 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21978 \begin_layout Standard
21979 To insert a float, use the menu
21981 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21985 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21986 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21988 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21989 \begin_inset Index idx
21992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21998 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21999 paragraph within the float.
22000 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
22001 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
22002 left-clicking on the box label.
22003 A closed float box looks like this:
22004 \begin_inset Graphics
22005 filename clipart/float.png
22010 – a gray button with a red label.
22013 \begin_layout Standard
22014 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
22016 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
22019 \begin_layout Subsection
22021 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22023 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22028 \begin_inset Index idx
22031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22032 Floats ! Figure floats
22040 \begin_layout Standard
22042 \begin_inset space ~
22046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22048 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22052 was created using the menu
22054 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22055 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22061 arg "float-insert figure"
22065 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22068 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22074 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22078 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22079 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22081 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22083 \begin_inset space ~
22091 arg "layout-paragraph"
22097 \begin_layout Standard
22098 \begin_inset Float figure
22103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22105 \begin_inset Graphics
22106 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22116 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22119 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22121 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22125 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22138 \begin_layout Standard
22139 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22140 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22142 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22151 ) and refer to it using the menu
22153 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22159 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22163 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22164 vague references like
22165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22172 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22173 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22183 For more about cross-references, see section
22184 \begin_inset space ~
22188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22190 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22197 \begin_layout Standard
22198 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22199 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22200 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22201 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22202 as described in section
22203 \begin_inset space ~
22207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22209 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22215 \begin_inset space ~
22219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22221 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22225 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22226 You can also set the images one below the other.
22228 \begin_inset space ~
22232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22234 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22241 reference "fig:Platypus"
22245 are the subfigures.
22248 \begin_layout Standard
22249 \begin_inset Float figure
22254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22255 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22259 \begin_inset Float figure
22264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22265 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22268 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22270 name "fig:Undefinable"
22282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22283 \begin_inset Graphics
22284 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22295 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22299 \begin_inset Float figure
22304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22305 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22308 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22310 name "fig:Platypus"
22322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22323 \begin_inset Graphics
22324 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22336 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22343 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22348 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22352 Two distorted images.
22365 \begin_layout Subsection
22367 \begin_inset Index idx
22370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22371 Floats ! Table floats
22379 \begin_layout Standard
22380 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22382 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22383 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22386 or the toolbar button
22389 arg "float-insert table"
22393 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22394 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22395 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22397 \begin_inset space ~
22401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22403 reference "tab:Table-float"
22410 \begin_layout Standard
22411 \begin_inset Float table
22416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22417 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22422 name "tab:Table-float"
22434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22436 \begin_inset Tabular
22437 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22438 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22439 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22440 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22441 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22568 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22589 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22592 \end{array}\right]$
22600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22613 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22634 \begin_layout Subsection
22636 \begin_inset Index idx
22639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22648 \begin_layout Standard
22650 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22651 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22652 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22654 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22662 \begin_inset space ~
22670 \begin_layout Section
22672 \begin_inset Index idx
22675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22684 \begin_layout Standard
22686 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22688 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22689 \begin_inset space \space{}
22696 \begin_layout Standard
22697 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22698 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22700 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22704 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22705 and its alignment within the page.
22708 \begin_layout Standard
22710 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22720 height_special "totalheight"
22725 backgroundcolor "none"
22728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22731 This is a minipage.
22732 The text is set in an italic style.
22735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22738 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22739 another formatting.
22747 \begin_layout Standard
22748 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22751 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22755 as described in section
22756 \begin_inset space ~
22760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22762 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22767 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22773 \begin_layout Standard
22774 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22784 height_special "totalheight"
22789 backgroundcolor "none"
22792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22793 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22794 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22800 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22804 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22814 height_special "totalheight"
22819 backgroundcolor "none"
22822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22823 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22824 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22832 \begin_layout Standard
22833 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22839 \begin_layout Standard
22840 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22842 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22849 \begin_inset space ~
22857 \begin_layout Chapter
22858 Mathematical Formulas
22859 \begin_inset Index idx
22862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22869 \begin_inset Index idx
22872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22901 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22903 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22910 \begin_layout Standard
22911 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22916 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22919 \begin_layout Section
22921 \begin_inset Index idx
22924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22933 \begin_layout Standard
22934 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22947 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22949 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22950 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22951 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22953 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22959 \begin_layout Standard
22960 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22964 \begin_inset space ~
22969 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22972 \begin_layout Standard
22973 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22974 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22977 \begin_layout Standard
22978 This is a line with an inline formula
22979 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22985 \begin_layout Standard
22986 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22987 paragraph, like this one:
22988 \begin_inset Formula
22995 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22998 \begin_layout Standard
23000 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
23002 For example, typing
23003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23016 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
23017 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
23021 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
23024 \begin_inset space ~
23032 \begin_layout Subsection
23033 Navigating in Formulas
23034 \begin_inset Index idx
23037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23046 \begin_layout Standard
23047 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
23048 achieved with the arrow keys.
23050 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
23051 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
23056 will leave a formula construct (a square root
23057 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
23061 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
23065 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23068 \end{array}\right]$
23076 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23081 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23082 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23085 \begin_layout Standard
23090 , printed in this document as
23091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23095 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23102 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23103 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23104 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23109 For example, if you want
23110 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23118 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23128 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23132 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23137 , since in the latter case only the
23140 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23145 will be under the square root sign:
23146 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23152 \begin_layout Standard
23153 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23155 \begin_inset Formula
23157 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23166 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23167 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23170 \begin_layout Subsection
23174 \begin_layout Standard
23175 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23176 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23180 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23181 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23182 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23183 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23184 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23188 \begin_layout Subsection
23189 Exponents and Subscripts
23190 \begin_inset Index idx
23193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23200 \begin_inset Index idx
23203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23212 \begin_layout Standard
23213 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23216 arg "math-superscript"
23222 arg "math-subscript"
23225 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23227 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23230 , type in a formula
23233 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23243 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23249 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23253 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23259 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23265 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23274 , you have to use an extra
23278 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23279 For example, if you want
23280 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23286 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23292 Subscripts are similar: To get
23293 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23299 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23307 \begin_layout Subsection
23309 \begin_inset Index idx
23312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23321 \begin_layout Standard
23322 Create a fraction either with the command
23328 or by using the icon
23331 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23337 \begin_inset space ~
23343 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23344 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23345 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23350 To move back up, press
23355 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23356 \begin_inset Formula
23358 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23361 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23369 \begin_layout Subsection
23371 \begin_inset Index idx
23374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23383 \begin_layout Standard
23384 Roots can be created using the
23387 \begin_inset space ~
23395 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23401 arg "math-insert \\root"
23423 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23429 always produces a square root.
23432 \begin_layout Subsection
23433 Operators with Limits
23434 \begin_inset Index idx
23437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23444 \begin_inset Index idx
23447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23454 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23456 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23463 \begin_layout Standard
23465 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23469 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23472 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23473 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23474 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23475 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23476 The sum operator will automatically place its
23477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23484 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23486 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23490 \begin_inset Formula
23492 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23497 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23501 \begin_layout Standard
23502 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23504 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23505 behind the operator and using the menu
23507 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23508 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23510 \begin_inset space ~
23514 \begin_inset space ~
23528 \begin_layout Standard
23529 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23538 \begin_inset Index idx
23541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23548 \begin_inset Formula
23550 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23555 which will place the
23556 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23568 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23569 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23575 \begin_layout Standard
23576 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23583 Have a look at section
23584 \begin_inset space ~
23588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23590 reference "subsec:Functions"
23594 for an explanation of function macros.
23597 \begin_layout Subsection
23599 \begin_inset Index idx
23602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23611 \begin_layout Standard
23612 Most math symbols can be found in the
23615 \begin_inset space ~
23620 under one of several categories; including
23637 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23641 \begin_layout Standard
23642 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23643 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23644 don't have to use the
23647 \begin_inset space ~
23652 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23654 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23657 \begin_layout Subsection
23659 \begin_inset Index idx
23662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23671 \begin_layout Standard
23672 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23678 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23684 \begin_inset space ~
23692 arg "math-insert \\space"
23696 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23697 For example, the sequence
23702 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23705 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23707 \begin_inset Graphics
23708 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23713 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23714 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23715 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23716 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23717 , because they are negative
23719 Here are two examples:
23722 \begin_layout Standard
23732 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23738 \begin_layout Standard
23748 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23754 \begin_layout Subsection
23756 \begin_inset Index idx
23759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23766 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23768 name "subsec:Functions"
23775 \begin_layout Standard
23779 \begin_inset space ~
23784 contains under the button
23787 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23790 a number of function macros, such as
23791 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23795 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23803 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23810 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23811 avoid confusions, because
23812 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23816 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23822 \begin_layout Standard
23823 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23825 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23829 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23835 \begin_layout Standard
23836 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23837 are placed, as described in section
23838 \begin_inset space ~
23842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23844 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23851 \begin_layout Subsection
23853 \begin_inset Index idx
23856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23865 \begin_layout Standard
23866 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23868 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23869 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23870 commands, for example, to enter
23871 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23874 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23875 Our example is entered by typing
23880 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23887 \begin_inset space ~
23891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23893 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23897 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23900 \begin_layout Standard
23901 \begin_inset Float table
23906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23907 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23910 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23912 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23916 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23926 \begin_inset Tabular
23927 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23928 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23929 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23930 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23931 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24015 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24069 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
24079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24123 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24177 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24231 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24285 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24339 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24393 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24447 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24492 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24513 \begin_layout Standard
24514 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24517 \begin_inset space ~
24525 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24528 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24532 \begin_layout Section
24533 Brackets and Delimiters
24534 \begin_inset Index idx
24537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24544 \begin_inset Index idx
24547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24554 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24556 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24563 \begin_layout Standard
24564 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24566 For some purposes, using just the keys
24571 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24572 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24573 toolbar delimiter icon
24576 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24580 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24581 \begin_inset Formula
24583 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24591 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24592 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24596 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24599 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24605 \begin_inset Formula
24607 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24615 \begin_layout Standard
24616 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24617 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24621 \begin_layout Standard
24622 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24623 left side and right side.
24624 If you use the option
24627 \begin_inset space ~
24632 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24633 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24635 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24640 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24641 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24644 \begin_layout Standard
24645 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24646 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24647 is to go inside the brackets.
24648 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24653 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24654 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24655 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24659 arg "math-delim ( )"
24665 \begin_layout Section
24666 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24667 \begin_inset Index idx
24670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24677 \begin_inset Index idx
24680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24687 \begin_inset Index idx
24690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24691 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24699 \begin_layout Standard
24700 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24704 \begin_inset space ~
24712 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24716 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24717 Here is an example:
24718 \begin_inset Formula
24720 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24729 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24730 \begin_inset space ~
24734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24736 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24741 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24742 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24743 This alignment is set in the box
24748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24797 for every column as default.
24798 For example, the sequence
24799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24810 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24811 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24812 corresponds to the relevant column.
24813 The result will look like this:
24814 \begin_inset Formula
24817 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24818 column & has & has\,right\\
24819 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24828 \begin_layout Standard
24829 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24832 arg "newline-insert newline"
24835 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24836 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24838 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24841 or the math toolbar.
24844 \begin_layout Standard
24845 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24846 It can be created with the menu
24848 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24849 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24851 \begin_inset space ~
24863 Here is an example:
24864 \begin_inset Formula
24878 \begin_layout Standard
24879 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24882 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24885 arg "newline-insert newline"
24889 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24894 arg "newline-insert newline"
24897 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24905 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24906 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24907 A new row is created by every further entry of
24910 arg "newline-insert newline"
24914 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24915 Here is an example:
24916 \begin_inset Formula
24918 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24919 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24924 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24925 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24926 \begin_inset Formula
24928 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24936 \begin_layout Standard
24937 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24944 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24945 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24948 reference "eq:asquared"
24953 The other types are described in section
24954 \begin_inset space ~
24958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24960 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24967 \begin_layout Section
24968 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24969 \begin_inset Index idx
24972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24973 Math ! Formula numbering
24979 \begin_inset Index idx
24982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24983 Math ! Referencing formulas
24989 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24991 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24998 \begin_layout Standard
24999 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
25001 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25002 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25004 \begin_inset space ~
25008 \begin_inset space ~
25016 arg "math-number-toggle"
25020 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25021 within parentheses.
25022 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
25023 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
25024 the document class.
25025 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
25026 separated by a dot:
25027 \begin_inset Formula
25037 arg "math-number-toggle"
25040 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
25041 You can only number displayed formulas.
25044 \begin_layout Standard
25045 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
25047 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25048 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25050 \begin_inset space ~
25054 \begin_inset space ~
25062 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
25065 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
25066 \begin_inset Formula
25069 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
25075 To number all lines use the shortcut
25078 arg "math-number-toggle"
25084 \begin_layout Standard
25085 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25088 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25089 A label is inserted with the menu
25091 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25100 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25101 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25102 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25114 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25115 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25116 We inserted in the following example the label
25117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25124 in the second line:
25125 \begin_inset Formula
25127 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25128 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25133 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25134 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25135 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25137 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25139 \begin_inset space ~
25147 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25151 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25152 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25153 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25154 as the formula number:
25157 \begin_layout Standard
25158 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25159 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25161 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25168 \begin_layout Standard
25169 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25170 's cross-reference box are described in section
25171 \begin_inset space ~
25175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25177 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25182 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25190 \begin_layout Section
25191 User defined math macros
25192 \begin_inset Index idx
25195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25204 \begin_layout Standard
25206 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25207 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25208 Math macros are explained in section
25211 \begin_inset space ~
25223 \begin_layout Section
25227 \begin_layout Subsection
25229 \begin_inset Index idx
25232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25241 \begin_layout Standard
25242 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25243 To set a font in a formula, use the
25246 \begin_inset space ~
25254 arg "math-insert \\font"
25257 , or enter its command, listed in table
25258 \begin_inset space ~
25262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25264 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25271 \begin_layout Standard
25272 \begin_inset Float table
25277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25278 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25281 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25283 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25287 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25297 \begin_inset Tabular
25298 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25299 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25300 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25301 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25333 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25360 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25387 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25420 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25447 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25474 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25508 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25535 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25569 \begin_layout Standard
25570 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25578 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25594 \begin_layout Standard
25595 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25596 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25601 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25602 space when you need a space in the box.
25603 Here is an example where
25604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25615 denotes the set of numbers:
25616 \begin_inset Formula
25618 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25626 \begin_layout Standard
25627 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25628 You can, for example, put a character in
25637 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25641 \begin_inset Newline newline
25644 So it is better not to use this feature.
25647 \begin_layout Standard
25648 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25649 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25653 \begin_inset Newline newline
25656 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25662 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25663 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25669 \begin_layout Standard
25676 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25679 \begin_layout Standard
25680 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25682 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25683 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25685 \begin_inset space ~
25693 \begin_layout Subsection
25695 \begin_inset Index idx
25698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25707 \begin_layout Standard
25708 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25710 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25714 \begin_inset space ~
25718 \begin_inset space ~
25726 \begin_inset space ~
25734 arg "math-insert \\font"
25738 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25739 in black instead of blue.
25740 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25741 Here is an example:
25742 \begin_inset Formula
25745 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25746 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25755 \begin_layout Subsection
25757 \begin_inset Index idx
25760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25769 \begin_layout Standard
25770 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25771 automatically chosen in most situations.
25789 For most characters,
25797 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25798 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25803 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25804 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25805 thinks are appropriate.
25806 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25809 arg "math-insert \\style"
25813 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25814 For example, you can set
25815 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25818 , which is normally in
25827 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25831 The four styles are used in the following example:
25834 \begin_layout Standard
25835 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25839 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25843 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25847 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25853 \begin_layout Standard
25854 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25855 is set in a particular size with the menu
25857 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25859 \begin_inset space ~
25864 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25865 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25866 will be adjusted to correspond.
25867 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25878 \begin_layout Standard
25882 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25888 \begin_layout Section
25889 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25891 \begin_inset Index idx
25894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25901 \begin_inset Index idx
25904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25913 \begin_layout Standard
25915 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25916 that are in common use.
25919 \begin_layout Subsection
25920 Enabling AMS-Support
25923 \begin_layout Standard
25924 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25925 the document by selecting the checkbox
25928 \begin_inset space ~
25932 \begin_inset space ~
25936 \begin_inset space ~
25943 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25947 \begin_inset Index idx
25950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25951 Document ! Settings
25959 \begin_inset space ~
25965 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25966 -errors in formulas,
25967 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25970 \begin_layout Subsection
25972 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25974 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25979 \begin_inset Index idx
25982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25983 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25991 \begin_layout Standard
25992 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25993 provides a selection of different formula types.
25995 allows you to choose between
26016 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
26017 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26023 , for an explanation of these formula types.
26026 \begin_layout Chapter
26030 \begin_layout Section
26032 \begin_inset Index idx
26035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26042 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26044 name "sec:Cross-References"
26051 \begin_layout Standard
26052 One of \SpecialChar LyX
26053 's strengths is cross-references.
26054 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
26056 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
26057 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
26058 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
26061 \begin_layout Enumerate
26065 \begin_layout Enumerate
26066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26068 name "enu:Second-item"
26075 \begin_layout Enumerate
26079 \begin_layout Standard
26080 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
26082 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26085 or by pressing the toolbar button
26092 A gray label box like this:
26093 \begin_inset Graphics
26094 filename clipart/label.png
26098 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26100 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26135 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26136 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26152 \begin_layout Standard
26153 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26155 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26158 or the toolbar button
26161 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26165 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26166 \begin_inset Graphics
26167 filename clipart/reference.png
26171 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26173 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26186 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26190 \begin_layout Standard
26191 As an alternative to
26193 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26196 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26201 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26202 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26204 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26216 \begin_layout Standard
26217 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26218 \begin_inset space ~
26222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26224 reference "enu:Second-item"
26231 \begin_layout Standard
26232 It is recommended to use a protected space
26236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26237 described in section
26238 \begin_inset space ~
26242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26244 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26253 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26254 line breaks between them.
26257 \begin_layout Standard
26258 There are six formats of cross-references:
26261 \begin_layout Description
26262 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26265 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26272 \begin_layout Description
26273 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26274 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26286 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26293 \begin_layout Description
26294 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26295 \begin_inset space ~
26299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26300 LatexCommand pageref
26301 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26308 \begin_layout Description
26310 \begin_inset space ~
26314 \begin_inset space ~
26317 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26319 LatexCommand vpageref
26320 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26325 \begin_inset Newline newline
26328 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26329 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26330 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26331 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26332 it prints “on the next page”.
26333 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26336 \begin_layout Description
26338 \begin_inset space ~
26342 \begin_inset space ~
26346 \begin_inset space ~
26349 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26352 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26357 \begin_inset Newline newline
26360 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26366 ; otherwise it behaves like
26370 \begin_inset space ~
26374 \begin_inset space ~
26383 \begin_layout Description
26385 \begin_inset space ~
26388 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26389 \begin_inset Newline newline
26393 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26401 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26411 \begin_inset Index idx
26414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26416 -packages ! prettyref
26422 \begin_inset Index idx
26425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26427 -packages ! refstyle
26438 \begin_inset Newline newline
26441 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26442 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26445 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26449 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26450 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26458 is the default and preferred because
26462 supports only English documents.
26463 The format is specified by using the command
26475 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26476 preamble of the document.
26477 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26490 ) can be done with this command
26491 \begin_inset Newline newline
26498 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26503 \begin_inset Newline newline
26506 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26508 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26510 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26517 \begin_layout Description
26519 \begin_inset space ~
26522 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26524 LatexCommand nameref
26525 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26532 \begin_layout Standard
26533 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26534 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26536 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26540 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26544 \begin_layout Standard
26545 You can only use the style
26549 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26553 is always possible.
26556 \begin_layout Standard
26557 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26558 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26560 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26561 \begin_inset space ~
26565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26567 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26574 \begin_layout Standard
26575 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26579 \begin_inset space ~
26583 \begin_inset space ~
26588 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26589 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26592 \begin_inset space ~
26597 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26598 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26601 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26607 \begin_layout Standard
26608 You can change labels at any time.
26609 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26610 do not need to think about this.
26613 \begin_layout Standard
26614 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26616 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26620 \begin_layout Standard
26621 References are described in detail in the section
26622 \begin_inset space ~
26632 \begin_inset space ~
26640 \begin_layout Section
26641 Table of Contents and other Listings
26642 \begin_inset Index idx
26645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26652 \begin_inset Index idx
26655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26656 Navigating ! Outline
26662 \begin_inset Index idx
26665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26681 \begin_layout Subsection
26683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26685 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26692 \begin_layout Standard
26693 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26695 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26696 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26698 \begin_inset space ~
26702 \begin_inset space ~
26708 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26710 If you click on it, the
26714 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26715 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26716 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26718 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26720 \begin_inset space ~
26725 that is described in section
26726 \begin_inset space ~
26730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26732 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26739 \begin_layout Standard
26740 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26741 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26743 \begin_inset space ~
26747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26749 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26753 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26755 \begin_inset space ~
26759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26761 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26765 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26767 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26770 \begin_layout Subsection
26771 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26772 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26774 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26781 \begin_layout Standard
26782 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26784 You can insert them via the
26786 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26790 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26793 \begin_layout Section
26794 URLs and Hyperlinks
26795 \begin_inset Index idx
26798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26805 \begin_inset Index idx
26808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26817 \begin_layout Subsection
26819 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26828 \begin_layout Standard
26829 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26831 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26837 \begin_layout Standard
26838 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26840 \begin_inset Flex URL
26843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26853 \begin_layout Standard
26854 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26860 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26864 \begin_layout Standard
26865 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26873 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26882 \begin_layout Subsection
26884 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26886 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26893 \begin_layout Standard
26894 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26896 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26899 or with the toolbar button
26906 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26915 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26916 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26917 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26919 name "LyX's homepage"
26920 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26924 , an Email address like this:
26925 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26927 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26928 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26933 , or a link to a file.
26936 \begin_layout Standard
26937 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26950 to the link target.
26953 \begin_layout Standard
26954 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26955 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26956 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26957 the text style dialog.
26958 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26962 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26964 name "LyX's homepage"
26965 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26972 \begin_layout Standard
26973 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26977 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26979 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26980 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26984 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26986 \begin_inset Newline newline
26994 \begin_inset Newline newline
27001 in the PDF Properties dialog.
27004 \begin_layout Section
27006 \begin_inset Index idx
27009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27016 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27018 name "sec:Appendices"
27025 \begin_layout Standard
27026 Appendices are created with the menu
27028 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27030 \begin_inset space ~
27034 \begin_inset space ~
27040 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
27041 as the appendix part of the book.
27042 This part is marked with a red borderline.
27045 \begin_layout Standard
27046 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
27047 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
27048 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
27049 and the subsection number.
27050 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
27054 \begin_layout Standard
27056 \begin_inset space ~
27060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27062 reference "chap:Credits"
27067 \begin_inset space ~
27071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27073 reference "subsec:Export"
27080 \begin_layout Section
27082 \begin_inset Index idx
27085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27092 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27094 name "sec:Bibliography"
27101 \begin_layout Standard
27102 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
27104 You can include a bibliography database,
27108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27109 Known under the name
27110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27113 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27123 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
27124 manually, using the paragraph environment
27128 , which was described in section
27129 \begin_inset space ~
27133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27135 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
27140 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27141 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27145 use a bibliography database.
27148 \begin_layout Subsection
27149 The Bibliography Environment
27152 \begin_layout Standard
27157 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27159 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27168 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27170 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27180 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27183 \begin_layout Standard
27184 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27186 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27189 or the toolbar button
27192 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27196 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27197 containing the available citations.
27198 Select one or more keys from the list and
27208 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27209 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27213 \begin_layout Standard
27214 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27215 entry with surrounding brackets.
27220 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27221 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27233 \begin_layout Standard
27237 Companion Second Edition
27240 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27242 key "latexcompanion"
27249 \begin_layout Standard
27250 The \SpecialChar LyX
27251 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27252 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27261 \begin_layout Standard
27262 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27265 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27267 \begin_inset space ~
27275 arg "layout-paragraph"
27279 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27282 \begin_layout Subsection
27283 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27285 \begin_inset Index idx
27288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27289 Bibliography ! Databases
27295 \begin_inset Index idx
27298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27299 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27306 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27308 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27315 \begin_layout Standard
27316 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27322 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27324 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27325 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27330 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27332 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27333 your working field in a database.
27334 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27335 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27336 list for that document.
27337 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27341 \begin_layout Standard
27342 The database is a text file with the file extension
27343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27354 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27355 The format is explained in
27356 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27362 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27364 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27366 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27371 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27372 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27373 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27375 \begin_inset Flex URL
27378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27380 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27388 \begin_layout Standard
27389 To use a database, use the menu
27391 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27396 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27398 \begin_inset space ~
27404 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27405 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27412 Add bibliography to TOC
27414 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27419 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27420 in the document or just the cited references.
27423 \begin_layout Standard
27424 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27436 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27437 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27438 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27439 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27441 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27447 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27448 \begin_inset Newline newline
27452 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27454 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27466 \begin_layout Standard
27467 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27470 \begin_layout Standard
27471 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27472 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27474 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27481 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27482 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27487 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27488 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27489 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27493 The following variants are possible:
27496 \begin_layout Description
27497 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27498 with other bibliography packages (e.
27499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27503 \begin_inset space \space{}
27510 ), only with the package
27514 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27518 \begin_layout Description
27519 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27520 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27521 with all bibliography packages, except
27526 \begin_layout Description
27527 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27532 , works with all bibliography packages
27535 \begin_layout Standard
27536 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27537 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27539 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27542 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27546 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27555 \begin_layout Standard
27556 When you select the option
27558 Sectioned bibliography
27562 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27563 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27566 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27567 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27569 Customizing Bibliographies
27573 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27578 Additional Features
27583 \begin_layout Standard
27584 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27585 the two methods of creating them.
27586 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27587 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27588 We used the style file
27592 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27595 \begin_layout Subsection
27597 \begin_inset Index idx
27600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27601 Bibliography ! Citation format
27609 \begin_layout Standard
27610 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27611 For this feature you need to enable the option
27617 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27621 \begin_inset Index idx
27624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27625 Document ! Settings
27635 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27636 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27637 style files as explained in
27638 the previous section.
27641 \begin_layout Standard
27642 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27643 the citation reference window.
27644 Here is an example where the text
27645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27649 \begin_inset space ~
27653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27656 appears after the reference:
27659 \begin_layout Standard
27661 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27664 key "latexcompanion"
27671 \begin_layout Section
27673 \begin_inset Index idx
27676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27692 \begin_layout Standard
27693 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27695 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27697 \begin_inset space ~
27702 or the toolbar button
27709 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27710 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27711 by \SpecialChar LyX
27712 as the index entry.
27715 \begin_layout Standard
27716 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27718 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27719 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27721 \begin_inset space ~
27727 A light blue box labeled
27728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27739 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27740 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27744 \begin_layout Standard
27745 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27746 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27747 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27748 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27750 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27752 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27759 \begin_layout Subsection
27760 Grouping Index Entries
27761 \begin_inset Index idx
27764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27773 \begin_layout Standard
27774 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27776 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27777 lists under the entry
27778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27786 First we create the entry
27787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27795 \begin_inset space ~
27799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27801 reference "subsec:Lists"
27806 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27807 \begin_inset space ~
27811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27813 reference "sec:Itemize"
27817 , we insert the command
27820 \begin_layout Standard
27826 \begin_layout Standard
27830 \begin_layout Standard
27836 \begin_layout Standard
27837 for the enumerated list in section
27838 \begin_inset space ~
27842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27844 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27851 \begin_layout Standard
27852 The exclamation mark
27853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27860 marks the grouping levels.
27861 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27862 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27863 If we don't have an index entry for
27864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27871 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27874 \begin_layout Subsection
27876 \begin_inset Index idx
27879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27880 Index ! Page ranges
27888 \begin_layout Standard
27889 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27891 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27892 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27893 an index entry in section
27894 \begin_inset space ~
27898 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27900 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27907 \begin_layout Standard
27910 Paragraph environments|(
27913 \begin_layout Standard
27914 and another entry at the end of section
27915 \begin_inset space ~
27919 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27921 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27928 \begin_layout Standard
27931 Paragraph environments|)
27934 \begin_layout Standard
27936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27959 respectively start and end the index range.
27960 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27961 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27962 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27963 An example is the index entry
27964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27967 Document ! Settings
27968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27974 \begin_layout Subsection
27976 \begin_inset Index idx
27979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27980 Index ! Cross referencing
27988 \begin_layout Standard
27989 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27990 We referred for example in the index entry
27991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27999 \begin_inset space ~
28003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28005 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
28009 ) to the index entry
28010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28017 in the same section using the entry
28020 \begin_layout Standard
28023 GIF|see{Image formats}
28026 \begin_layout Standard
28027 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
28029 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
28030 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
28033 \begin_layout Subsection
28035 \begin_inset Index idx
28038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28039 Index ! Entry order
28047 \begin_layout Standard
28048 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
28049 follow the rules for the index order.
28050 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
28055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28056 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
28058 \begin_inset space ~
28062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28064 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28073 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
28074 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
28075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28099 \begin_inset Index idx
28102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28103 Dummy entries ! maïs
28109 \begin_inset Index idx
28112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28113 Dummy entries ! maître
28119 \begin_inset Index idx
28122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28123 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
28128 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28129 maïs, maison, maître.
28130 To achieve this, we use the command
28133 \begin_layout Standard
28136 previous entry@current entry
28139 \begin_layout Standard
28140 In our case we want to have
28141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28156 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28159 \begin_layout Standard
28165 \begin_layout Standard
28166 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28167 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28169 See the next subsection for an example.
28172 \begin_layout Standard
28173 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28179 \begin_layout Standard
28180 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28185 to generate the index (see section
28186 \begin_inset space ~
28190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28192 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28201 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28202 -package aeguill in section
28203 \begin_inset space ~
28207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28209 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28213 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28214 -packages although all these index
28215 commands start with
28216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28229 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28234 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28237 \begin_layout Standard
28249 \begin_layout Standard
28261 \begin_layout Subsection
28263 \begin_inset Index idx
28266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28267 Index ! Entry layout
28275 \begin_layout Standard
28276 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28277 \begin_inset Index idx
28280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28283 This is an italic dummy entry
28288 You can also format the page number using the character
28289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28296 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28297 -command without a backslash.
28298 We can write for example
28301 \begin_layout Standard
28304 italic page number:|textit
28307 \begin_layout Standard
28308 to get the page number in italic.
28309 \begin_inset Index idx
28312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28313 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28318 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28319 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28337 \begin_inset space ~
28343 Have a look at section
28344 \begin_inset space ~
28348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28350 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28354 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28358 \begin_layout Standard
28359 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28367 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28371 to generate the index, see section
28372 \begin_inset space ~
28376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28378 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28387 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28392 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28393 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28396 key "latexcompanion"
28408 \begin_layout Standard
28409 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28411 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28412 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28413 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28414 If so, put the following in the preamble
28417 \begin_layout Standard
28429 \begin_layout Standard
28433 \begin_layout Standard
28439 \begin_layout Standard
28440 in the index entry.
28441 \begin_inset Index idx
28444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28445 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28450 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28451 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28452 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28455 \begin_layout Standard
28456 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28457 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28458 a bold font for all index entries.
28459 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28471 documentation for details,
28472 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28474 key "makeindex,xindy"
28481 \begin_layout Subsection
28483 \begin_inset Index idx
28486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28493 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28495 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28502 \begin_layout Standard
28503 If the index generation program
28507 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28508 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28512 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28513 distribution, is used.
28517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28522 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28523 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28524 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28525 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28526 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28536 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28538 dialog, see section
28539 \begin_inset space ~
28543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28545 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28550 The available options are listed and explained in
28551 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28553 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
28558 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28562 \begin_layout Standard
28563 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28564 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28567 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28568 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28572 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28573 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28576 \begin_layout Subsection
28580 \begin_layout Standard
28581 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28582 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28590 next to the standard index.
28592 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28593 that add this feature.
28600 \begin_inset Index idx
28603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28605 -packages ! splitidx
28610 package to generate multiple indexes.
28611 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28617 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28619 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28626 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28627 style, but it also includes
28628 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28629 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28637 \begin_layout Standard
28638 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28639 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28641 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28642 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28645 and select the option
28647 Use multiple Indexes
28654 already contains the standard index
28655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28663 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28664 also appear as a heading) to the
28668 input field and press the
28673 The new index now also appears in the list.
28674 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28675 label color to the new index.
28678 \begin_layout Standard
28679 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28682 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28689 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28690 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28691 are additional features:
28694 \begin_layout Itemize
28695 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28696 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28699 \begin_layout Itemize
28700 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28701 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28709 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28710 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28711 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28712 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28715 \begin_layout Section
28716 Nomenclature/Glossary
28717 \begin_inset Index idx
28720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28727 \begin_inset Index idx
28730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28759 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28761 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28768 \begin_layout Standard
28769 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28770 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28771 called nomenclature or glossary.
28774 \begin_layout Standard
28775 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28782 \begin_inset Index idx
28785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28787 -packages ! nomencl
28793 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28795 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28801 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28805 \begin_layout Standard
28806 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28807 and then use the menu
28809 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28815 \begin_inset space ~
28820 or the toolbar button
28823 arg "nomencl-insert"
28828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28839 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28842 \begin_layout Standard
28843 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28844 The first is the term or
28848 that you wish to define.
28853 of the term or symbol.
28856 \begin_layout Standard
28857 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28865 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28866 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28874 \begin_layout Subsection
28875 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28876 \begin_inset Index idx
28879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28880 Nomenclature ! Layout
28888 \begin_layout Standard
28889 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28893 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28900 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28908 \begin_inset Newline newline
28916 \begin_inset Newline newline
28922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28929 character starts/ends the formula.
28930 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28931 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28943 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28953 \begin_layout Standard
28954 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28955 -syntax is given in section
28956 \begin_inset space ~
28960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28962 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28969 \begin_layout Standard
28973 \begin_inset space ~
28978 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28980 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28985 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28992 in this document is:
28993 \begin_inset Newline newline
28998 dummy entry for the character
29003 \begin_inset Newline newline
29015 \begin_inset space ~
29025 font use the command
29054 \begin_layout Standard
29055 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
29056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29060 \begin_inset space \space{}
29064 \begin_inset Newline newline
29080 \begin_inset Newline newline
29083 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
29084 This command will make the font of all symbols
29091 \begin_inset space ~
29099 \begin_layout Standard
29100 If the characters |
29101 \begin_inset space \space{}
29105 \begin_inset space \space{}
29109 \begin_inset space \space{}
29113 \begin_inset space \space{}
29117 \begin_inset space \space{}
29120 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
29121 a quote character in front of them.
29122 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29123 LatexCommand nomenclature
29124 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
29125 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
29132 \begin_layout Subsection
29133 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
29134 \begin_inset Index idx
29137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29138 Nomenclature ! Sort order
29146 \begin_layout Standard
29147 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29148 -code of the symbol
29150 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
29152 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
29155 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29156 LatexCommand nomenclature
29158 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29165 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29169 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29170 LatexCommand nomenclature
29173 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29178 They will be sorted by
29179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29205 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29208 will be sorted before the
29212 since the character
29213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29220 is considered in sorting.
29223 \begin_layout Standard
29224 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29227 \begin_inset space ~
29232 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29233 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29235 For the example given, you can insert
29239 in this field for the
29240 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29247 will be located before
29248 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29254 \begin_layout Standard
29255 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29260 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29269 \begin_layout Subsection
29270 Nomenclature Options
29271 \begin_inset Index idx
29274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29275 Nomenclature ! Options
29283 \begin_layout Standard
29288 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29289 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29292 \begin_layout Description
29293 refeq Appends the phrase
29294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29309 to every nomenclature entry, where
29315 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29318 \begin_layout Description
29319 refpage Appends the phrase
29320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29335 to every nomenclature entry, where
29341 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29344 \begin_layout Description
29345 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29348 \begin_layout Standard
29349 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29350 class options list in the
29352 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29356 In this document the options
29363 \begin_layout Standard
29364 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29370 \begin_layout Standard
29371 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29372 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29377 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29380 \begin_layout Description
29390 \begin_layout Description
29393 nomrefpage Like the
29400 \begin_layout Description
29403 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29412 \begin_layout Description
29416 \begin_inset space ~
29422 \begin_inset space ~
29427 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29430 \begin_layout Standard
29432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29439 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29440 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29444 \begin_layout Standard
29452 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29455 \begin_inset Newline newline
29462 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29467 \begin_inset Newline newline
29471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29486 by their translation.
29489 \begin_layout Subsection
29490 Printing the Nomenclature
29491 \begin_inset Index idx
29494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29495 Nomenclature ! Printing
29503 \begin_layout Standard
29504 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29506 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29507 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29523 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29524 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29525 You can choose between these settings:
29528 \begin_layout Description
29529 Default a space of 1
29530 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29536 \begin_layout Description
29538 \begin_inset space ~
29542 \begin_inset space ~
29545 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29548 \begin_layout Description
29549 Custom custom space
29552 \begin_layout Standard
29553 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29562 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29570 For example, in order to change the name to
29574 , add the following line to the preamble:
29577 \begin_layout Standard
29585 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29588 \begin_layout Subsection
29589 Nomenclature Program
29590 \begin_inset Index idx
29593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29594 Nomenclature ! Program
29600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29602 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29609 \begin_layout Standard
29615 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29616 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29618 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29623 by adding options, see section
29624 \begin_inset space ~
29628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29630 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29635 The available options are listed and explained in
29636 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29638 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29645 \begin_layout Section
29647 \begin_inset Index idx
29650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29657 \begin_inset Index idx
29660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29661 Document ! Branches
29667 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29669 name "sec:Branches"
29676 \begin_layout Standard
29677 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29678 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29679 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29680 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29683 \begin_layout Standard
29684 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29685 allows you to put text into branches.
29686 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29687 To create a branch, either select the menu
29689 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29690 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29693 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29695 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29702 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29703 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29704 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29705 and whether the name of the branch should
29706 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29707 (see below for an example).
29708 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29709 to the name of the other) and to add
29710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29718 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29722 \begin_inset space ~
29725 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29726 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29729 \begin_layout Standard
29730 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29731 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29733 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29736 where you can choose a branch.
29737 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29741 \begin_layout Standard
29742 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29743 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29746 \begin_layout Standard
29747 \begin_inset Branch Question
29751 \begin_layout Standard
29752 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29760 \begin_layout Standard
29761 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29765 \begin_layout Standard
29766 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29774 \begin_layout Standard
29781 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29782 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29785 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29786 Consider for example a file
29787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29794 which has the above branches.
29796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29803 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29827 branch were inactive,
29828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29843 branch was active, likewise
29844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29859 branch was active, and
29860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29863 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29867 if both branches were active.
29868 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29869 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296009
29873 \begin_layout Standard
29875 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
29876 As of LyX 2.3.0, there are also
29877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29884 branch insets, whose content is output just in case the branch is
29890 \begin_inset Branch Question
29894 \begin_layout Standard
29896 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296217
29897 For example, this material will only appear when the Question branch is
29905 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
29906 To control whether a particular inset is
29907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29914 , right-click on the inset button and choose
29915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29921 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
29923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29927 \change_deleted 424524441 1468296150
29931 \begin_layout Standard
29932 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29938 \begin_layout Standard
29939 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29940 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29941 definitions for each branch.
29942 For example you can define for the question branch
29946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29947 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29948 -syntax, see section
29949 \begin_inset space ~
29953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29955 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29967 \begin_layout Standard
29977 \begin_layout Standard
29987 \begin_layout Standard
29988 and for the answer branch
29991 \begin_layout Standard
30001 \begin_layout Standard
30011 \begin_layout Standard
30012 \begin_inset Branch Question
30016 \begin_layout Standard
30020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30048 \begin_layout Standard
30049 \begin_inset Branch Answer
30053 \begin_layout Standard
30057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30085 \begin_layout Standard
30086 Now it is possible to use the
30090 question{\SpecialChar ldots
30097 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
30100 commands to obtain conditional output.
30101 Here is an example formula where only the
30108 \begin_inset Formula
30110 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
30118 \begin_layout Standard
30119 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
30127 \begin_layout Standard
30128 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
30130 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30134 \begin_inset space \space{}
30137 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
30139 For this advanced usage, see the
30145 Flex insets and InsetLayout
30150 \begin_layout Section
30152 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30154 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
30159 \begin_inset Index idx
30162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30171 \begin_layout Standard
30174 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30175 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30178 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
30180 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30186 \begin_inset Index idx
30189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30191 -packages ! hyperref
30196 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
30197 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
30198 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
30199 part of the document.
30203 \begin_layout Standard
30204 The header information in the dialog tab
30208 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
30209 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
30210 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
30211 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
30215 \begin_inset space ~
30219 \begin_inset space ~
30224 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30225 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30226 and author entries.
30230 \begin_inset space ~
30234 \begin_inset space ~
30238 \begin_inset space ~
30243 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30246 \begin_layout Standard
30247 You can specify in the dialog tab
30251 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30256 \begin_inset space ~
30260 \begin_inset space ~
30264 \begin_inset space ~
30269 option allows long links to be split;
30272 \begin_inset space ~
30276 \begin_inset space ~
30280 \begin_inset space ~
30288 \begin_inset space ~
30293 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30296 \begin_inset space ~
30301 colors the different links.
30302 The default colors are:
30305 \begin_layout Labeling
30306 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30311 for hyperlinks and URLs
30314 \begin_layout Labeling
30315 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30323 \begin_layout Labeling
30324 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30332 \begin_layout Standard
30333 but you can change these in the field
30338 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30341 \begin_layout Standard
30344 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30347 \begin_layout Standard
30352 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30353 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30354 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30357 \begin_layout Standard
30362 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30363 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30364 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30374 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30375 when opening the PDF.
30377 \begin_inset space ~
30380 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30381 \begin_inset space ~
30384 1 will only display the sections.
30387 \begin_layout Standard
30388 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30389 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30395 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30396 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30405 \begin_layout Section
30407 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30409 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30411 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30418 \begin_layout Subsection
30421 \begin_inset Index idx
30424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30432 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30434 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30441 \begin_layout Standard
30442 As \SpecialChar LyX
30443 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30444 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30445 commands and constructs,
30448 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30449 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30450 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30451 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30452 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30453 cannot support all packages and
30457 \begin_layout Standard
30458 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30459 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30460 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30464 Code box is created by the menu
30466 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30468 \begin_inset space ~
30473 or by the toolbar button
30486 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30494 \begin_layout Standard
30495 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30497 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30499 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30500 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30507 , you can write the command part
30513 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30514 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30518 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30519 Code box behind the word.
30520 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30521 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30525 \begin_layout Standard
30526 \begin_inset Graphics
30527 filename clipart/ERT.png
30535 \begin_layout Standard
30539 \begin_layout Standard
30540 This is a line with a
30544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30567 \begin_layout Standard
30568 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30576 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30577 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30578 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30579 know that the command is finished.
30587 \begin_layout Subsection
30588 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30590 \begin_inset Argument 1
30593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30594 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30601 \begin_inset Index idx
30604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30612 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30614 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30621 \begin_layout Standard
30622 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30623 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30624 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30625 uses in the background.
30626 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30627 is based on commands, you can
30628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30636 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30637 any time if you know the right commands.
30638 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30639 is the end of the day.
30640 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30641 all caption labels bold.
30642 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30644 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30648 \begin_layout Standard
30649 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30651 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30653 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30656 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30665 \begin_layout Standard
30666 As result you find that the package
30671 \begin_inset Index idx
30674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30676 -packages ! caption
30682 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30684 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30687 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30691 \begin_inset space ~
30699 \begin_layout Standard
30704 usepackage[options]{package name}
30707 \begin_layout Standard
30708 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30709 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30710 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30711 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30714 \begin_layout Standard
30715 In your case the package name is
30720 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30725 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30726 So you add the command
30729 \begin_layout Standard
30734 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30737 \begin_layout Standard
30738 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30743 For more commands provided by the
30747 package, have a look at its documentation,
30748 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30762 \begin_layout Standard
30763 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30765 For example if you use a
30769 class, you don't need the package
30773 , you can instead write
30776 \begin_layout Standard
30781 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30786 \begin_layout Standard
30787 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30788 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30789 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30796 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30799 \begin_layout Standard
30800 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30801 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30803 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30804 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30805 Code box as described in the previous
30809 \begin_layout Standard
30810 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30811 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30814 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30816 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30823 \begin_layout Standard
30824 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30830 \begin_layout Standard
30834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30844 \begin_inset Note Note
30847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30848 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30856 \begin_layout Left Header
30857 \begin_inset Argument 1
30860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30880 \begin_inset Note Note
30883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30884 defines the header line as described below
30892 \begin_layout Center Header
30893 \begin_inset Argument 1
30896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30905 \begin_layout Right Header
30906 \begin_inset Argument 1
30909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30930 \begin_layout Left Footer
30931 \begin_inset Argument 1
30934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30955 \begin_layout Center Footer
30956 \begin_inset Argument 1
30959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30971 \begin_inset Newline newline
30975 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30981 \begin_layout Right Footer
30982 \begin_inset Argument 1
30985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31007 \begin_layout Section
31008 Customized Page Headers and Footers
31009 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31011 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
31016 \begin_inset Index idx
31019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31020 Document ! Header/Footer line
31026 \begin_inset Index idx
31029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31038 \begin_layout Standard
31039 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
31043 \begin_inset space ~
31054 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31060 \begin_inset space ~
31066 As a second step add in the menu
31068 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31069 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31078 Custom Header/Footerlines
31081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31085 This module offers the following 6
31086 \begin_inset space ~
31092 \begin_layout Description
31094 \begin_inset space ~
31098 \begin_inset space ~
31102 \begin_inset space ~
31106 \begin_inset space ~
31110 \begin_inset space ~
31116 \begin_layout Description
31118 \begin_inset space ~
31122 \begin_inset space ~
31126 \begin_inset space ~
31130 \begin_inset space ~
31134 \begin_inset space ~
31140 \begin_layout Standard
31141 for the different positions in the header/footer.
31142 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
31145 \begin_layout Standard
31146 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
31147 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
31149 \begin_inset space ~
31153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31155 reference "fig:Page-layout"
31159 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
31162 \begin_layout Standard
31163 \begin_inset Float figure
31169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31172 \begin_inset Tabular
31173 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
31174 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
31175 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31176 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31177 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31179 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
31191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31197 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31208 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31226 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31237 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31241 The normal text on the page goes here.
31242 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31244 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31245 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
31250 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31259 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31270 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31288 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31299 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31317 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31335 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31338 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31340 name "fig:Page-layout"
31344 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31357 \begin_layout Standard
31358 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31366 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31370 \begin_inset space ~
31375 is set to “Default”.
31376 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31385 \begin_layout Subsection
31389 \begin_layout Standard
31390 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
31391 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
31392 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31393 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31395 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
31397 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31400 \begin_layout Standard
31401 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31402 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31406 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31408 \begin_inset space ~
31416 \begin_layout Description
31419 thepage prints the current page number
31422 \begin_layout Description
31425 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31428 \begin_layout Description
31431 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31434 \begin_layout Description
31437 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31438 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31445 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31448 because it usually goes in a left header.
31451 \begin_layout Description
31454 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31455 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31457 It is normally used in the right header.
31460 \begin_layout Subsection
31461 Default header/footer
31464 \begin_layout Standard
31465 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31466 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31467 footer has the page number.
31468 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31469 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31470 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31473 \begin_inset space ~
31481 \begin_layout Subsection
31485 \begin_layout Standard
31486 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31487 Some pages are different.
31488 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
31489 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
31490 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31491 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31492 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31495 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31496 Header and footer decoration line
31499 \begin_layout Standard
31500 By default, you get a 0.4
31501 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31504 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31505 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31517 in the following way:
31520 \begin_layout Standard
31527 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31530 \begin_layout Standard
31531 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31544 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31545 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31551 \begin_layout Standard
31552 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31554 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
31555 \begin_inset space ~
31559 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31568 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31569 Several header/footer lines
31572 \begin_layout Standard
31573 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31574 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
31575 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31577 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31592 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31593 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31595 \begin_inset space ~
31603 \begin_layout Standard
31610 headheight}{height}
31613 \begin_layout Standard
31618 is a size in standard units (e.
31619 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31623 \begin_inset space \space{}
31631 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
31632 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31633 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31634 logfile with the menu
31636 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31638 \begin_inset space ~
31646 \begin_inset space ~
31651 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31656 \begin_inset Index idx
31659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31661 -packages ! fancyhdr
31667 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31668 for your header/footer.
31671 \begin_layout Subsection
31675 \begin_layout Standard
31676 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31677 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31678 This example consists of the following definition:
31681 \begin_layout Description
31683 \begin_inset space ~
31692 , empty optional argument
31695 \begin_layout Description
31697 \begin_inset space ~
31700 Header empty, empty optional argument
31703 \begin_layout Description
31705 \begin_inset space ~
31714 in the optional argument
31717 \begin_layout Description
31719 \begin_inset space ~
31728 in the optional argument
31731 \begin_layout Description
31733 \begin_inset space ~
31746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31750 \begin_inset Newline newline
31754 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31761 in the optional argument
31764 \begin_layout Description
31766 \begin_inset space ~
31775 , empty optional argument
31778 \begin_layout Description
31781 headrulewidth set to 2
31782 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31788 \begin_layout Standard
31789 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31790 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31796 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31805 \begin_layout Standard
31806 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31812 \begin_layout Standard
31816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31820 pagestyle{headings}
31826 \begin_inset Note Note
31829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31830 switches back to page style with the default headings
31838 \begin_layout Section
31839 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31840 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31842 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31847 \begin_inset Index idx
31850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31857 \begin_inset Index idx
31860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31869 \begin_layout Standard
31871 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31872 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31873 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31876 \begin_layout Subsection
31880 \begin_layout Standard
31881 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31887 \begin_inset Index idx
31890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31892 -packages ! preview-latex
31897 (on some systems named simply
31902 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31904 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31910 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31912 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31920 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31921 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31922 -package are automatically
31923 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31927 \begin_layout Subsection
31931 \begin_layout Standard
31932 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31933 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31935 activate the option
31938 \begin_inset space ~
31945 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31951 \begin_inset space ~
31955 \begin_inset space ~
31958 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31965 \begin_inset space ~
31978 \begin_inset space ~
31983 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31986 \begin_layout Standard
31987 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31992 \begin_inset space ~
32000 \begin_inset space ~
32008 \begin_layout Standard
32009 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
32010 and when you finish
32014 \begin_layout Standard
32015 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32023 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
32024 generated by activating the option
32027 \begin_inset space ~
32033 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
32041 \begin_layout Subsection
32042 Selected document parts
32045 \begin_layout Standard
32046 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
32047 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
32048 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
32049 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32051 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
32053 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32057 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
32058 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
32059 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
32062 \begin_layout Standard
32063 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32070 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32082 is explained in section
32084 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
32089 \begin_inset space ~
32099 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
32100 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
32101 the final rotated boxes,
32102 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
32103 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
32105 Here is the result:
32108 \begin_layout Standard
32109 \begin_inset Preview
32111 \begin_layout Standard
32116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32120 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
32126 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
32136 height_special "totalheight"
32141 backgroundcolor "none"
32144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32169 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
32175 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
32182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32197 \begin_layout Standard
32198 Previewing works also for colors.
32199 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32218 is explained in section
32225 \begin_inset space ~
32238 \begin_layout Standard
32239 \begin_inset Preview
32241 \begin_layout Standard
32245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32264 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32269 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32288 \begin_layout Standard
32289 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32295 \begin_layout Standard
32296 If \SpecialChar LyX
32297 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32298 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32299 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32300 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32301 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32302 the \SpecialChar TeX
32304 If \SpecialChar LyX
32305 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32306 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32308 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32309 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32310 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32313 \begin_layout Subsection
32318 \begin_layout Standard
32319 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32320 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32323 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32325 \begin_inset space ~
32330 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32332 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32334 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32335 's main window, then only this selection
32336 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32337 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32338 the source view window.
32343 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32344 ; but note that if you have
32345 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32347 not just the one which is open at the time.
32350 \begin_layout Section
32351 Advanced Find and Replace
32352 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32354 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32359 \begin_inset Index idx
32362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32369 \begin_inset Index idx
32372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32381 \begin_layout Subsection
32385 \begin_layout Standard
32386 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32387 allows for searching of complex,
32388 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32390 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32391 The key-features are:
32394 \begin_layout Itemize
32395 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32396 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32397 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32401 \begin_layout Itemize
32402 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32403 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32404 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32405 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32408 \begin_layout Itemize
32409 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32410 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32411 outside of mathematics environments
32414 \begin_layout Itemize
32415 Search may be widened to a specific
32420 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32424 \begin_inset space ~
32427 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32428 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32435 \begin_layout Itemize
32436 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32437 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32438 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32442 \begin_inset space ~
32445 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32448 \begin_layout Subsection
32452 \begin_layout Standard
32453 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32455 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32468 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32471 ) or the toolbar button
32474 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32480 Advanced Find and Replace
32485 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32489 \begin_layout Standard
32495 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32499 \begin_inset space ~
32504 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32507 arg "paragraph-break"
32511 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32512 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32516 arg "paragraph-break"
32519 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32523 searches backwards.
32526 \begin_layout Standard
32530 \begin_inset space ~
32535 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32544 \begin_inset space ~
32549 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32552 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32553 Searching for mathematics
32556 \begin_layout Standard
32557 Mathematical formulas, such as
32558 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32561 or something more complex like
32562 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32565 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32570 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32571 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32572 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32573 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
32579 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32583 \begin_layout Standard
32584 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32585 This is done by switching to the
32589 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32594 This way, entering in the
32601 \begin_layout Itemize
32602 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32603 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32606 \begin_layout Itemize
32607 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32608 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32611 \begin_layout Itemize
32612 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32613 of it only within section headings.
32614 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32615 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32619 \begin_layout Itemize
32620 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32621 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32624 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32628 \begin_layout Standard
32629 The entries made in the
32633 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32636 \begin_inset space ~
32642 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32646 button or alternatively press
32649 arg "paragraph-break"
32656 while the cursor is in the
32659 \begin_inset space ~
32667 \begin_layout Standard
32668 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32670 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32674 \begin_layout Itemize
32675 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32676 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32684 with its typewriter version
32685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32699 \begin_layout Itemize
32700 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32706 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32718 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32725 (you may want to enable the
32728 \begin_inset space ~
32736 \begin_inset space ~
32741 options and disable the
32749 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32757 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32758 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32762 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32765 , or occurrences of
32766 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32770 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32776 \begin_layout Subsection
32780 \begin_layout Standard
32781 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32786 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32788 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32790 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32799 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32805 This is done with the context menu
32807 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32808 Insert Regular Expression
32810 while the cursor is in the
32815 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32816 expression matching rules
32820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32821 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32824 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32828 \begin_inset space ~
32831 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32832 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32838 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32839 same text in the document.
32840 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32841 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32844 \begin_layout Enumerate
32845 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32850 editor the fraction
32851 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32855 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32858 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32859 fractions with the given denominator.
32862 \begin_layout Enumerate
32863 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32875 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32880 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32881 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32882 Also, by inserting a
32883 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32886 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32887 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32890 \begin_layout Standard
32891 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32892 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32893 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32896 , and referring back to them through
32897 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32901 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32905 For example, try searching with the regexp
32906 \begin_inset Newline newline
32909 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32912 \begin_inset Newline newline
32915 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32918 \begin_layout Standard
32919 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32922 \begin_layout Standard
32923 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32931 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32932 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32933 sub-expressions is absolute.
32935 \begin_inset space ~
32939 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32942 always refers to the first occurrence of
32943 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32946 in all entered regexps.
32954 \begin_layout Section
32956 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32958 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32963 \begin_inset Index idx
32966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32975 \begin_layout Standard
32977 has a built-in spell checker.
32980 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32987 key or the toolbar button
32990 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32993 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32994 beginning of the currently selected text.
32995 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32996 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32997 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32998 scrolled so that it is visible.
32999 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
33000 n, if any could be found.
33001 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
33005 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
33006 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
33009 \begin_layout Standard
33010 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
33013 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33017 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
33018 a different one at the top of the dialog.
33020 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
33021 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
33024 \begin_inset space ~
33032 arg "dialog-show character"
33035 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
33037 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
33040 \begin_layout Standard
33041 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
33042 can be downloaded from here:
33043 \begin_inset Newline newline
33047 \begin_inset Flex URL
33050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33052 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
33058 \begin_inset Newline newline
33062 \begin_inset space ~
33065 files for each language.
33066 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
33067 \begin_inset space ~
33070 files into \SpecialChar LyX
33071 's installation subfolder
33079 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33081 \begin_inset Newline newline
33084 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
33085 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
33086 but in most cases these are
33102 is the language code.
33105 \begin_layout Subsection
33109 \begin_layout Standard
33112 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33113 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33115 \begin_inset space ~
33118 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33121 you can set the following things:
33124 \begin_layout Description
33126 \begin_inset space ~
33129 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
33130 should use for spell checking.
33131 Depending on your platform,
33145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33146 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
33147 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
33162 \begin_inset space ~
33165 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
33168 \begin_layout Description
33170 \begin_inset space ~
33173 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
33174 will always use the given language
33175 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
33178 \begin_layout Description
33180 \begin_inset space ~
33183 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
33185 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33189 \begin_inset space \space{}
33193 This should normally not be needed.
33196 \begin_layout Description
33198 \begin_inset space ~
33202 \begin_inset space ~
33205 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
33207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33217 \begin_layout Description
33219 \begin_inset space ~
33222 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
33223 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
33224 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
33225 appear in a context menu.
33226 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
33230 \begin_layout Description
33232 \begin_inset space ~
33236 \begin_inset space ~
33240 \begin_inset space ~
33243 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33247 \begin_layout Section
33249 \begin_inset Index idx
33252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33259 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33261 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33268 \begin_layout Standard
33270 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33271 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33281 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33283 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33292 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33294 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33295 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33296 which are available for many languages.
33299 \begin_layout Standard
33300 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33301 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33305 \begin_layout Subsection
33306 Setting up the thesaurus
33309 \begin_layout Standard
33318 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33322 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33327 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33329 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33333 \begin_inset space ~
33341 For instance, the US English files are named:
33344 \begin_layout Itemize
33348 \begin_layout Itemize
33352 \begin_layout Standard
33361 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33362 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33365 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33366 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33367 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33369 \begin_inset space ~
33374 ) to the path where they are installed.
33378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33379 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33380 ies, typical locations are
33386 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33390 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33394 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33397 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33403 LibreOffice-<Version>
33410 On the Mac, the default location is
33412 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33413 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33414 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33415 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33416 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33417 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33425 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33426 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33427 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33431 \begin_layout Standard
33432 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33433 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33437 \begin_layout Itemize
33438 \begin_inset Flex URL
33441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33443 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33451 \begin_layout Standard
33452 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33453 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33455 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33456 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33457 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33459 \begin_inset space ~
33464 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33466 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33467 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33471 \begin_layout Standard
33472 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33474 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33477 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33483 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33486 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33487 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33489 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33495 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33496 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33497 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33499 \begin_inset space ~
33504 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33507 \begin_layout Subsection
33508 Using the thesaurus
33511 \begin_layout Standard
33512 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33514 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33517 or the toolbar button
33520 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33523 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33525 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33527 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33528 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33529 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33538 ), related terms (such as
33541 \begin_inset space ~
33550 ), compounds (such as
33553 \begin_inset space ~
33562 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33571 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33574 \begin_layout Standard
33575 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33576 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33580 \begin_layout Standard
33581 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33582 the dictionary, such as the above
33586 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33587 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33591 \begin_inset space \space{}
33594 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33595 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33596 For example, looking up the word form
33600 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33605 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33606 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33610 \begin_inset space \space{}
33621 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33622 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33623 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33626 \begin_layout Section
33628 \begin_inset Index idx
33631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33638 \begin_inset Index idx
33641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33642 Document ! Change Tracking
33648 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33650 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33657 \begin_layout Standard
33658 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33659 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33660 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33661 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33663 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33665 \begin_inset space ~
33668 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33670 \begin_inset space ~
33678 \begin_layout Standard
33679 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33693 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33694 You can change the color in
33696 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33697 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33699 \begin_inset space ~
33703 \begin_inset space ~
33708 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33714 \begin_inset Index idx
33717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33718 Color ! Change tracking
33723 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33724 's status bar when the
33725 cursor is in changed text.
33726 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33729 arg "changes-merge"
33735 \begin_layout Standard
33736 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33738 \begin_inset Index idx
33741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33750 \begin_layout Standard
33751 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33757 \begin_layout Standard
33758 \begin_inset Graphics
33759 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33767 \begin_layout Standard
33768 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33774 \begin_layout Standard
33775 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33778 \begin_layout Standard
33779 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33785 \begin_layout Standard
33786 \begin_inset Tabular
33787 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33788 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33789 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33790 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33791 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33800 arg "changes-track"
33808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33814 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33816 \begin_inset space ~
33819 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33821 \begin_inset space ~
33830 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33839 arg "changes-output"
33847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33853 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33855 \begin_inset space ~
33858 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33860 \begin_inset space ~
33864 \begin_inset space ~
33868 \begin_inset space ~
33877 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33898 Jumps to the next change
33904 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33913 arg "change-accept"
33921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33927 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33929 \begin_inset space ~
33932 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33934 \begin_inset space ~
33943 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33952 arg "change-reject"
33960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33966 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33968 \begin_inset space ~
33971 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33973 \begin_inset space ~
33982 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33991 arg "changes-merge"
33999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34005 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34007 \begin_inset space ~
34010 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34012 \begin_inset space ~
34021 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34030 arg "all-changes-accept"
34038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34044 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34046 \begin_inset space ~
34049 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34051 \begin_inset space ~
34055 \begin_inset space ~
34064 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34073 arg "all-changes-reject"
34081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34087 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34089 \begin_inset space ~
34092 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34094 \begin_inset space ~
34098 \begin_inset space ~
34107 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34130 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34131 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
34133 \begin_inset space ~
34142 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34165 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
34167 \begin_inset space ~
34183 \begin_layout Standard
34184 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34190 \begin_layout Standard
34191 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
34211 \begin_layout Standard
34212 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
34213 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
34214 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
34215 the next change after the current cursor position.
34216 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
34217 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
34218 step to the next change.
34219 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
34222 \begin_layout Standard
34223 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
34224 to describe a change.
34227 \begin_layout Standard
34228 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34234 \begin_inset Index idx
34237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34239 -packages ! dvipost
34245 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34247 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34253 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34257 \begin_layout Section
34258 Comparison of Documents
34259 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34261 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34266 \begin_inset Index idx
34269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34270 Comparison of documents
34278 \begin_layout Standard
34279 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34282 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34286 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34287 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34289 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34291 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34295 \begin_inset space ~
34299 \begin_inset space ~
34303 \begin_inset space ~
34312 \begin_inset space ~
34316 \begin_inset space ~
34320 \begin_inset space ~
34324 \begin_inset space ~
34328 \begin_inset space ~
34332 \begin_inset space ~
34337 enables the change tracking option
34340 \begin_inset space ~
34344 \begin_inset space ~
34348 \begin_inset space ~
34353 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34356 \begin_layout Section
34357 International Support
34358 \begin_inset Index idx
34361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34362 International support
34370 \begin_layout Standard
34371 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34372 with any language you want.
34373 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34374 up \SpecialChar LyX
34376 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34378 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34385 \begin_layout Standard
34386 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34387 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34388 \begin_inset space ~
34392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34394 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34401 \begin_layout Subsection
34403 \begin_inset Index idx
34406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34413 \begin_inset Index idx
34416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34417 Document ! Settings
34423 \begin_inset Index idx
34426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34427 Document ! Language
34435 \begin_layout Standard
34438 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34439 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34442 dialog lets you set
34444 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34449 \begin_layout Standard
34454 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34459 \begin_inset space ~
34464 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34465 For details about the different encoding options see section
34466 \begin_inset space ~
34470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34472 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34479 \begin_layout Subsection
34480 Keyboard mapping configuration
34481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34483 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34490 \begin_layout Standard
34491 If you have for example a U.
34492 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34495 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34496 can use an alternate keymap.
34497 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34502 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34503 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34504 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34507 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34508 \begin_inset space ~
34512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34514 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34519 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34520 which one you want to use.
34523 \begin_layout Standard
34524 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34525 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34526 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34527 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34530 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34531 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34532 one to support the characters you want.
34533 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34540 \begin_layout Chapter
34543 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34545 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34552 \begin_layout Standard
34553 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34554 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34555 topic inside the user's guide.
34558 \begin_layout Section
34560 \begin_inset Index idx
34563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34572 \begin_layout Standard
34577 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34580 \begin_layout Subsection
34584 \begin_layout Standard
34585 Creates a new document.
34588 \begin_layout Subsection
34592 \begin_layout Standard
34593 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34594 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34595 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34598 \begin_layout Subsection
34602 \begin_layout Standard
34606 \begin_layout Subsection
34610 \begin_layout Standard
34611 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34612 Click there on a file to open it.
34615 \begin_layout Subsection
34619 \begin_layout Standard
34620 Closes the current document.
34623 \begin_layout Subsection
34627 \begin_layout Standard
34628 Closes all opened documents.
34631 \begin_layout Subsection
34635 \begin_layout Standard
34636 Saves the actual document.
34639 \begin_layout Subsection
34643 \begin_layout Standard
34644 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34647 \begin_layout Subsection
34651 \begin_layout Standard
34652 Saves all opened documents.
34655 \begin_layout Subsection
34659 \begin_layout Standard
34660 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34663 \begin_layout Subsection
34667 \begin_layout Standard
34668 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34669 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34670 It is described in the section
34672 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34677 Additional Features
34682 \begin_layout Subsection
34686 \begin_layout Standard
34687 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34688 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34690 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34691 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34695 \begin_layout Standard
34696 When using the menu entry
34699 \begin_inset space ~
34704 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34708 \begin_inset space ~
34712 \begin_inset space ~
34716 \begin_inset space ~
34721 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34722 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34725 \begin_layout Subsection
34727 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34729 name "subsec:Export"
34736 \begin_layout Standard
34737 You can export your document to various file formats.
34738 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34740 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34741 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34742 during its configuration.
34745 \begin_layout Standard
34746 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34748 \begin_inset space ~
34752 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34754 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34761 \begin_layout Description
34767 \begin_inset space ~
34770 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34772 \begin_inset space ~
34775 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34776 \begin_inset Newline newline
34779 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34780 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34784 \begin_layout Description
34785 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34791 \begin_layout Description
34793 \begin_inset space ~
34796 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34802 \begin_layout Description
34803 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34804 's native DVI-format.
34805 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34806 files paths or file names in your document.
34808 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34815 \begin_layout Description
34816 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34817 in files paths or file names
34820 \begin_layout Description
34822 \begin_inset space ~
34829 ) DVI-format using the program
34831 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34834 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34838 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34846 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34854 \begin_layout Description
34856 \begin_inset space ~
34859 (cropped) the same as
34863 but with cropped page margins.
34866 \begin_layout Description
34868 \begin_inset space ~
34871 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34875 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34880 \begin_layout Description
34884 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34892 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34900 \begin_layout Description
34902 \begin_inset space ~
34906 \begin_inset space ~
34909 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34913 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34921 \begin_layout Description
34925 \begin_inset space ~
34934 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34935 source that is compilable with the program
34937 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34941 \begin_layout Description
34945 \begin_inset space ~
34950 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34951 source, additionally all images used in the document
34952 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34956 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34959 \begin_layout Description
34963 \begin_inset space ~
34968 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34969 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34970 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34978 \begin_layout Description
34982 \begin_inset space ~
34991 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34992 source that is compilable with the program
34998 \begin_layout Description
35000 \begin_inset space ~
35004 \begin_inset space ~
35011 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35012 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
35018 \begin_layout Description
35020 \begin_inset space ~
35023 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
35024 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
35026 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35030 \begin_inset space \space{}
35035 \begin_inset space ~
35039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35054 represent the version number)
35057 \begin_layout Description
35059 \begin_inset space ~
35063 \begin_inset space ~
35066 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
35067 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
35068 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35072 \begin_layout Description
35073 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
35074 's internal XHTML engine
35077 \begin_layout Description
35079 \begin_inset space ~
35083 \begin_inset space ~
35087 \begin_inset space ~
35091 \begin_inset space ~
35094 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
35099 For the conversion the program
35108 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35111 \begin_layout Description
35112 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
35117 \begin_layout Description
35119 \begin_inset space ~
35122 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
35124 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
35127 For the conversion the program
35136 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35139 \begin_layout Description
35141 \begin_inset space ~
35144 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
35145 For the conversion the program
35154 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35157 \begin_layout Description
35159 \begin_inset space ~
35162 (cropped) the same as
35165 \begin_inset space ~
35170 but with cropped page margins
35173 \begin_layout Description
35177 \begin_inset space ~
35182 PDF-format using the program
35186 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35189 \begin_layout Description
35193 \begin_inset space ~
35197 \begin_inset space ~
35205 \begin_inset space ~
35210 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
35211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35215 \begin_inset space \space{}
35218 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
35222 \begin_layout Description
35226 \begin_inset space ~
35231 PDF-format using the program
35233 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35236 , produces PDF-files directly
35239 \begin_layout Description
35243 \begin_inset space ~
35248 PDF-format using the program
35252 , produces PDF-files directly
35255 \begin_layout Description
35259 \begin_inset space ~
35264 PDF-format using the program
35268 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35271 \begin_layout Description
35275 \begin_inset space ~
35280 PDF-format using the program
35285 , produces PDF-files directly
35288 \begin_layout Description
35292 \begin_inset space ~
35300 \begin_layout Description
35304 \begin_inset space ~
35308 \begin_inset space ~
35313 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35314 and then exported as text using the program
35319 \begin_layout Description
35324 PostScript format using the program
35332 options see section
35333 \begin_inset space ~
35337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35339 reference "subsec:General-output"
35346 \begin_layout Description
35347 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35348 source and also code in the statistical programming
35362 it is possible to use
35366 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35370 \begin_layout Standard
35371 If one of the menu entries
35378 \begin_inset space ~
35387 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35389 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35391 \begin_inset space ~
35395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35397 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35402 \begin_inset Index idx
35405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35406 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35415 \begin_layout Subsection
35419 \begin_layout Standard
35420 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35421 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35424 \begin_inset space ~
35428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35430 reference "sec:Paths"
35435 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35444 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35445 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35446 's preferences as described in section
35447 \begin_inset space ~
35451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35453 reference "subsec:Converters"
35460 \begin_layout Subsection
35461 New and Close Window
35464 \begin_layout Standard
35465 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35469 \begin_layout Subsection
35473 \begin_layout Standard
35474 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35477 \begin_layout Section
35479 \begin_inset Index idx
35482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35491 \begin_layout Subsection
35495 \begin_layout Standard
35496 Described in section
35497 \begin_inset space ~
35501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35503 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35510 \begin_layout Subsection
35511 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35514 \begin_layout Standard
35515 Described in section
35516 \begin_inset space ~
35520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35522 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35529 \begin_layout Subsection
35533 \begin_layout Standard
35534 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35535 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35538 \begin_layout Subsection
35542 \begin_layout Standard
35543 Selects the whole document.
35546 \begin_layout Subsection
35547 Find & Replace (Quick)
35550 \begin_layout Standard
35551 Described in section
35552 \begin_inset space ~
35556 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35558 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35565 \begin_layout Subsection
35566 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35569 \begin_layout Standard
35570 Described in section
35571 \begin_inset space ~
35575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35577 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35584 \begin_layout Subsection
35585 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35588 \begin_layout Standard
35589 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35593 \begin_layout Subsection
35597 \begin_layout Standard
35598 Described in section
35599 \begin_inset space ~
35603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35605 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35612 \begin_layout Subsection
35614 \begin_inset Index idx
35617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35618 Paragraph ! Settings
35626 \begin_layout Standard
35627 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35628 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35632 \begin_layout Standard
35633 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35634 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35640 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35641 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35643 \begin_inset space ~
35651 \begin_layout Subsection
35652 Table and Rows & Columns
35655 \begin_layout Standard
35656 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
35657 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35658 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
35661 \begin_layout Subsection
35665 \begin_layout Standard
35666 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
35667 It will dissolve this inset.
35668 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
35672 \begin_layout Subsection
35676 \begin_layout Standard
35677 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
35678 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
35681 \begin_layout Subsection
35682 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35685 \begin_layout Standard
35686 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35688 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35689 \begin_inset space ~
35693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35695 reference "sec:Nesting"
35700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35702 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35709 \begin_layout Subsection
35712 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35715 \begin_layout Standard
35716 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35717 nts of the same type.
35719 \begin_inset space ~
35723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35725 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35729 for an explanation.
35732 \begin_layout Section
35734 \begin_inset Index idx
35737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35746 \begin_layout Standard
35747 At the bottom of the
35751 menu the opened documents are listed.
35754 \begin_layout Subsection
35755 Open/Close all Insets
35758 \begin_layout Standard
35759 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35762 \begin_layout Subsection
35763 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35766 \begin_layout Standard
35767 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35770 \begin_layout Standard
35771 Math macros are described in the
35778 \begin_layout Subsection
35782 \begin_layout Standard
35783 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35784 \begin_inset space ~
35788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35790 reference "sec:Navigating"
35795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35797 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35804 \begin_layout Subsection
35808 \begin_layout Standard
35809 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35811 \begin_inset space ~
35815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35817 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35824 \begin_layout Subsection
35828 \begin_layout Standard
35829 Opens a window showing console messages.
35830 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35832 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35835 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35836 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35837 is processing the document.
35840 \begin_layout Subsection
35842 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35844 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35849 \begin_inset Index idx
35852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35861 \begin_layout Standard
35862 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35863 All toolbars and the
35866 \begin_inset space ~
35871 can be turned on and off.
35876 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35888 \begin_inset space ~
35900 \begin_inset space ~
35905 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35909 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35916 \begin_layout Standard
35921 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35925 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35926 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35927 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35928 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35929 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35932 \begin_layout Standard
35934 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35935 \begin_inset space ~
35939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35941 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35948 \begin_layout Subsection
35952 \begin_layout Standard
35956 \begin_inset space ~
35960 \begin_inset space ~
35964 \begin_inset space ~
35968 \begin_inset space ~
35972 \begin_inset space ~
35976 \begin_inset space ~
35981 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35982 's main window vertically while
35985 \begin_inset space ~
35989 \begin_inset space ~
35993 \begin_inset space ~
35997 \begin_inset space ~
36001 \begin_inset space ~
36005 \begin_inset space ~
36010 will split it horizontally.
36011 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
36012 to view the same document, but at different positions.
36013 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
36014 three or more documents at the same time.
36015 To close a split view, use the menu
36018 \begin_inset space ~
36022 \begin_inset space ~
36030 \begin_layout Subsection
36034 \begin_layout Standard
36035 Closes a split view.
36038 \begin_layout Subsection
36042 \begin_layout Standard
36043 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
36044 so that you will see nothing but your text.
36045 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
36046 's main window fullscreen.
36047 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
36048 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
36051 \begin_layout Section
36053 \begin_inset Index idx
36056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36065 \begin_layout Subsection
36069 \begin_layout Standard
36070 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
36071 \begin_inset space ~
36075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36077 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
36088 \begin_layout Subsection
36090 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36092 name "subsec:Special-Character"
36099 \begin_layout Standard
36100 Here you can insert the following characters:
36103 \begin_layout Description
36108 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
36111 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
36112 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36113 -packages you have installed.
36114 You can get a complete display by checking
36117 \begin_inset space ~
36123 \begin_inset Newline newline
36127 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36135 Not all characters will be visible in the
36139 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
36140 dialog (see section
36141 \begin_inset space ~
36145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36147 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
36151 ) can display every character.
36159 \begin_layout Description
36160 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
36164 \begin_layout Description
36166 \begin_inset space ~
36170 \begin_inset space ~
36173 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
36174 \begin_inset space ~
36178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36180 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
36187 \begin_layout Description
36189 \begin_inset space ~
36192 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
36195 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36196 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36202 \begin_layout Description
36204 \begin_inset space ~
36207 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
36210 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36211 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36217 \begin_layout Description
36219 \begin_inset space ~
36222 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
36226 \begin_layout Description
36228 \begin_inset space ~
36231 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
36235 \begin_layout Description
36237 \begin_inset space ~
36240 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
36246 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36252 \begin_layout Description
36254 \begin_inset space ~
36257 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
36261 \begin_layout Description
36263 \begin_inset space ~
36267 \begin_inset Index idx
36270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36277 \begin_inset Index idx
36280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36281 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36286 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36287 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36289 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36295 \begin_inset Index idx
36298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36306 \begin_inset Newline newline
36309 More information about this feature can be found in the
36315 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36321 \begin_layout Description
36322 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
36324 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
36325 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
36329 \begin_layout Subsection
36333 \begin_layout Standard
36334 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36337 \begin_layout Description
36338 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36339 \begin_inset script superscript
36341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36350 \begin_layout Description
36351 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36352 \begin_inset script subscript
36354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36363 \begin_layout Description
36365 \begin_inset space ~
36368 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36369 \begin_inset space ~
36373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36375 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36382 \begin_layout Description
36384 \begin_inset space ~
36387 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36388 \begin_inset space ~
36392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36394 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36401 \begin_layout Description
36403 \begin_inset space ~
36406 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36407 \begin_inset space ~
36411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36413 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36420 \begin_layout Description
36422 \begin_inset space ~
36425 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36427 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36431 \begin_inset space \space{}
36434 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36435 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36444 To insert a fraction use the command
36449 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36453 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36462 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36469 \begin_layout Description
36471 \begin_inset space ~
36474 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36475 \begin_inset space ~
36479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36481 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36488 \begin_layout Description
36490 \begin_inset space ~
36493 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36494 \begin_inset space ~
36498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36500 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36507 \begin_layout Description
36509 \begin_inset space ~
36512 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36513 \begin_inset space ~
36517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36519 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36526 \begin_layout Description
36527 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36528 \begin_inset space ~
36532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36534 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36541 \begin_layout Description
36543 \begin_inset space ~
36546 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36547 \begin_inset space ~
36551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36553 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36560 \begin_layout Description
36562 \begin_inset space ~
36565 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36566 \begin_inset space ~
36570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36572 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36579 \begin_layout Description
36581 \begin_inset space ~
36585 \begin_inset space ~
36588 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36589 \begin_inset space ~
36593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36595 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36602 \begin_layout Description
36604 \begin_inset space ~
36607 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36608 as described in section
36609 \begin_inset space ~
36613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36615 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36622 \begin_layout Description
36624 \begin_inset space ~
36627 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36628 \begin_inset space ~
36632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36634 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36641 \begin_layout Description
36643 \begin_inset space ~
36646 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36647 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36649 \begin_inset space ~
36653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36655 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36662 \begin_layout Description
36664 \begin_inset space ~
36667 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36668 \begin_inset space ~
36672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36674 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36681 \begin_layout Description
36683 \begin_inset space ~
36687 \begin_inset space ~
36690 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36691 \begin_inset space ~
36695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36697 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36704 \begin_layout Subsection
36708 \begin_layout Standard
36709 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36713 \begin_inset space ~
36734 are described in section
36735 \begin_inset space ~
36739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36741 reference "sec:toc"
36750 is described in section
36751 \begin_inset space ~
36755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36757 reference "sec:Index"
36765 is described in section
36766 \begin_inset space ~
36770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36772 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36778 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36781 is described in section
36782 \begin_inset space ~
36786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36788 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36795 \begin_layout Subsection
36799 \begin_layout Standard
36800 To insert floats, as described in section
36801 \begin_inset space ~
36805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36807 reference "sec:Floats"
36811 and in detail the chapter
36818 \begin_inset space ~
36826 \begin_layout Subsection
36830 \begin_layout Standard
36831 To insert notes, described in section
36832 \begin_inset space ~
36836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36838 reference "sec:Notes"
36845 \begin_layout Subsection
36849 \begin_layout Standard
36850 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36852 Branches are described in section
36853 \begin_inset space ~
36857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36859 reference "sec:Branches"
36866 \begin_layout Subsection
36870 \begin_layout Standard
36871 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36872 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36874 An example is the document class
36875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36882 with three custom insets.
36885 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36889 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36895 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36898 \begin_layout Subsection
36900 \begin_inset Index idx
36903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36912 \begin_layout Standard
36913 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36915 For more information see chapter
36917 External Document Parts
36920 \begin_inset space ~
36926 \begin_layout Subsection
36928 \begin_inset Index idx
36931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36940 \begin_layout Standard
36941 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36942 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36949 \begin_inset space ~
36957 \begin_layout Subsection
36961 \begin_layout Standard
36966 dialog as described in section
36967 \begin_inset space ~
36971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36973 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36980 \begin_layout Subsection
36984 \begin_layout Standard
36989 as described in section
36990 \begin_inset space ~
36994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36996 reference "sec:Cross-References"
37003 \begin_layout Subsection
37007 \begin_layout Standard
37012 as described in section
37013 \begin_inset space ~
37017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37019 reference "sec:Cross-References"
37026 \begin_layout Subsection
37028 \begin_inset Index idx
37031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37038 \begin_inset Index idx
37041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37042 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
37050 \begin_layout Standard
37051 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
37052 Floats are described in section
37053 \begin_inset space ~
37057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37059 reference "sec:Floats"
37063 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
37065 Multi-page Captions
37070 \begin_inset space ~
37078 \begin_layout Subsection
37082 \begin_layout Standard
37083 Inserts an index entry as described in section
37084 \begin_inset space ~
37088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37090 reference "sec:Index"
37097 \begin_layout Subsection
37101 \begin_layout Standard
37102 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
37103 \begin_inset space ~
37107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37109 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
37116 \begin_layout Subsection
37120 \begin_layout Standard
37121 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
37122 Tables are described in section
37123 \begin_inset space ~
37127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37129 reference "sec:Tables"
37133 and in detail in the chapter
37140 \begin_inset space ~
37148 \begin_layout Subsection
37152 \begin_layout Standard
37158 Graphics are described in section
37159 \begin_inset space ~
37163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37165 reference "sec:Graphics"
37172 \begin_layout Subsection
37176 \begin_layout Standard
37177 Inserts a URL as described in section
37178 \begin_inset space ~
37182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37184 reference "subsec:URLs"
37191 \begin_layout Subsection
37195 \begin_layout Standard
37196 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
37197 \begin_inset space ~
37201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37203 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
37210 \begin_layout Subsection
37214 \begin_layout Standard
37215 Inserts a footnote as described in section
37216 \begin_inset space ~
37220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37222 reference "sec:Footnotes"
37229 \begin_layout Subsection
37233 \begin_layout Standard
37234 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
37235 \begin_inset space ~
37239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37241 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
37248 \begin_layout Subsection
37252 \begin_layout Standard
37253 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
37254 title or caption of a float.
37255 Inserts a short title as described in section
37256 \begin_inset space ~
37260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37262 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
37269 \begin_layout Subsection
37274 \begin_layout Standard
37275 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
37276 Code box as described in section
37277 \begin_inset space ~
37281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37283 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37290 \begin_layout Subsection
37292 \begin_inset Index idx
37295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37304 \begin_layout Standard
37305 Inserts a program listings box.
37306 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37308 Program Code Listings
37313 \begin_inset space ~
37321 \begin_layout Subsection
37325 \begin_layout Standard
37326 Inserts the actual date.
37327 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37331 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37339 \begin_inset space ~
37347 \begin_layout Subsection
37351 \begin_layout Standard
37352 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37353 \begin_inset space ~
37357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37359 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37366 \begin_layout Section
37368 \begin_inset Index idx
37371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37380 \begin_layout Standard
37381 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37382 \begin_inset space ~
37385 of the current document.
37386 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37389 \begin_layout Subsection
37393 \begin_layout Standard
37394 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37395 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37396 to jump, for example, between section
37397 \begin_inset space ~
37401 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37402 \begin_inset space ~
37405 2.5 and use the submenu
37408 \begin_inset space ~
37412 \begin_inset space ~
37419 \begin_inset space ~
37425 \begin_inset space ~
37429 \begin_inset space ~
37435 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37439 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37445 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37448 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37451 \begin_layout Standard
37452 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37456 \begin_inset space ~
37461 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37464 \begin_inset space ~
37469 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37472 \begin_layout Subsection
37473 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37476 \begin_layout Standard
37477 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37481 \begin_layout Subsection
37485 \begin_layout Standard
37486 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37487 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37488 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37492 \begin_inset space ~
37496 \begin_inset space ~
37504 \begin_layout Subsection
37508 \begin_layout Standard
37509 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37512 The \SpecialChar LyX
37513 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37515 \begin_inset space ~
37523 \begin_inset space ~
37528 manual for a detailed description.
37531 \begin_layout Section
37533 \begin_inset Index idx
37536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37545 \begin_layout Subsection
37549 \begin_layout Standard
37550 Change Tracking is described in section
37551 \begin_inset space ~
37555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37557 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37564 \begin_layout Subsection
37572 \begin_layout Standard
37573 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37574 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37575 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37577 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37578 to the clipboard or update the view.
37579 \begin_inset Newline newline
37582 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37586 \begin_layout Standard
37589 Open Containing Directory
37591 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
37592 's temporary folder for the document.
37593 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
37594 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
37595 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
37596 For example some journals require to send the
37600 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37604 \begin_layout Subsection
37605 Start Appendix Here
37608 \begin_layout Standard
37609 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37610 as described in section
37611 \begin_inset space ~
37615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37617 reference "sec:Appendices"
37624 \begin_layout Subsection
37626 \begin_inset space ~
37632 \begin_layout Standard
37633 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37634 default output format for the document (menu
37636 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37637 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37638 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37640 \begin_inset space ~
37644 \begin_inset space ~
37650 \begin_inset space ~
37654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37656 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
37660 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37663 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37664 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37666 \begin_inset space ~
37669 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37671 \begin_inset space ~
37674 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37676 \begin_inset space ~
37680 \begin_inset space ~
37686 \begin_inset space ~
37690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37692 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37696 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37697 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37699 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37700 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37702 \begin_inset space ~
37705 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37707 \begin_inset space ~
37710 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37714 \begin_inset space ~
37718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37720 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37725 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37726 when it is first configured.
37727 The default output format is
37730 \begin_inset space ~
37738 \begin_layout Subsection
37739 View (Other Formats)
37742 \begin_layout Standard
37743 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37744 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37745 actual document with an external program.
37746 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37747 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37748 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37750 All possible formats are listed in section
37751 \begin_inset space ~
37755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37757 reference "subsec:Export"
37762 You should at least see the menu entry
37767 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37769 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37771 \begin_inset space ~
37775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37777 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37782 \begin_inset Index idx
37785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37786 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37795 \begin_layout Standard
37796 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37797 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37799 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37800 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37802 \begin_inset space ~
37805 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37807 \begin_inset space ~
37810 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37814 \begin_inset space ~
37818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37820 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37825 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37826 when it is first configured.
37829 \begin_layout Subsection
37831 \begin_inset space ~
37837 \begin_layout Standard
37838 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37839 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37842 \begin_layout Subsection
37843 Update (Other Formats)
37846 \begin_layout Standard
37847 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37848 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37851 \begin_layout Subsection
37852 View Master Document
37855 \begin_layout Standard
37856 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37872 \begin_inset space ~
37877 manual for more information on this topic).
37878 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37879 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37883 \begin_inset space ~
37887 \begin_inset space ~
37892 generates the output of the whole book, while
37896 will just output the chapter alone.
37899 \begin_layout Standard
37900 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37901 in the document settings (menu
37903 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37904 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37905 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37907 \begin_inset space ~
37911 \begin_inset space ~
37917 \begin_inset space ~
37921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37923 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
37927 ) or in the preferences (menu
37929 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37930 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37932 \begin_inset space ~
37935 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37937 \begin_inset space ~
37940 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37942 \begin_inset space ~
37946 \begin_inset space ~
37952 \begin_inset space ~
37956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37958 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37965 \begin_layout Subsection
37966 Update Master Document
37969 \begin_layout Standard
37970 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37986 \begin_inset space ~
37991 manual for more information on this topic).
37992 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37993 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37996 \begin_layout Standard
37997 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37998 in the document settings (menu
38000 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38001 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38002 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
38004 \begin_inset space ~
38008 \begin_inset space ~
38014 \begin_inset space ~
38018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38020 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
38024 ) or in the preferences (menu
38026 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38027 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38029 \begin_inset space ~
38032 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38034 \begin_inset space ~
38037 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38039 \begin_inset space ~
38043 \begin_inset space ~
38049 \begin_inset space ~
38053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38055 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38062 \begin_layout Subsection
38064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38066 name "subsec:Compressed"
38073 \begin_layout Standard
38074 Un/compresses the current document.
38075 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
38076 compression (see the
38078 Additional Features
38080 manual for details).
38083 \begin_layout Subsection
38087 \begin_layout Standard
38088 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
38091 \begin_layout Subsection
38095 \begin_layout Standard
38096 The document settings are described in appendix
38097 \begin_inset space ~
38101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38103 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
38110 \begin_layout Section
38112 \begin_inset Index idx
38115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38124 \begin_layout Subsection
38128 \begin_layout Standard
38129 Spell checking is explained in section
38130 \begin_inset space ~
38134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38136 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
38143 \begin_layout Subsection
38147 \begin_layout Standard
38148 The thesaurus is described in section
38149 \begin_inset space ~
38153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38155 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
38162 \begin_layout Subsection
38164 \begin_inset Index idx
38167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38174 \begin_inset Index idx
38177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38186 \begin_layout Standard
38187 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
38188 the highlighted document part.
38191 \begin_layout Subsection
38197 \begin_inset Index idx
38200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38201 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38210 \begin_layout Standard
38211 Generates with the help of the program
38213 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38216 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
38217 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
38218 This feature is not available on Windows.
38221 \begin_layout Subsection
38227 \begin_inset Index idx
38230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38240 \begin_layout Standard
38241 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38246 \begin_inset space ~
38251 to see the full filename paths.
38254 \begin_layout Subsection
38256 \begin_inset Index idx
38259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38268 \begin_layout Standard
38269 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
38270 files as described in section
38271 \begin_inset space ~
38275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38277 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38284 \begin_layout Subsection
38286 \begin_inset Index idx
38289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38302 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38320 \begin_inset Index idx
38323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38324 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38333 \begin_layout Standard
38334 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38335 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38336 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38337 -packages and programs it needs; see
38339 \begin_inset space ~
38343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38345 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38352 \begin_layout Subsection
38356 \begin_layout Standard
38361 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38362 \begin_inset space ~
38366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38368 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38375 \begin_layout Section
38377 \begin_inset Index idx
38380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38389 \begin_layout Standard
38390 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38391 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38393 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38397 \begin_layout Standard
38401 \begin_inset space ~
38406 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38407 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38408 packages and classes found
38409 by \SpecialChar LyX
38411 \begin_inset space ~
38415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38417 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38424 \begin_layout Standard
38428 \begin_inset space ~
38433 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38438 \begin_layout Section
38440 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38442 name "sec:Toolbars"
38449 \begin_layout Standard
38450 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38451 \begin_inset space ~
38455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38457 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38464 \begin_layout Standard
38465 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38466 This is described in the
38468 Additional Features
38473 \begin_layout Subsection
38475 \begin_inset Index idx
38478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38487 \begin_layout Standard
38488 \begin_inset Graphics
38489 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38497 \begin_layout Standard
38498 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38504 \begin_layout Standard
38505 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38522 \begin_inset Note Note
38525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38526 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38531 manual for more information.
38539 \begin_layout Standard
38540 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38546 \begin_layout Standard
38547 \begin_inset Tabular
38548 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38549 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38550 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38551 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38557 \begin_inset Graphics
38558 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38572 pull-down box for the environments
38585 \begin_layout Standard
38586 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38592 \begin_layout Standard
38594 \begin_inset Tabular
38595 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38596 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38597 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38598 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38599 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38622 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38629 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38652 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38659 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38682 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38689 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38698 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38712 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38719 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38728 arg "spelling-continuously"
38736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38740 Spellcheck continuously
38746 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38769 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38776 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38799 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38806 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38829 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38836 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38859 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38866 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38889 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38896 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38905 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38919 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38921 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38925 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38929 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38938 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38945 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38959 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38965 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38978 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38987 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39001 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
39002 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
39009 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39030 Emphasize text, function of the
39032 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39034 \begin_inset space ~
39037 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39046 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39067 Set text to noun style, function of the
39069 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39071 \begin_inset space ~
39074 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39083 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39092 arg "textstyle-apply"
39100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39104 Format text using the current settings in the
39106 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39108 \begin_inset space ~
39111 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39120 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39143 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39144 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39146 \begin_inset space ~
39155 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39164 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
39172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39178 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39185 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39192 arg "tabular-insert"
39200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39206 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39213 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39222 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
39230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39234 Toggle outline window on/off,
39236 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
39243 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39252 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
39260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39264 Toggle math toolbar on/off
39270 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39279 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
39287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39291 Toggle table toolbar on/off
39304 \begin_layout Subsection
39306 \begin_inset Index idx
39309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39318 \begin_layout Standard
39319 \begin_inset Graphics
39320 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39328 \begin_layout Standard
39329 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39335 \begin_layout Standard
39336 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39340 \begin_layout Standard
39341 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39347 \begin_layout Standard
39348 \begin_inset Tabular
39349 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39350 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39351 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39352 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39353 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39380 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39389 arg "layout Enumerate"
39397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39407 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39416 arg "layout Itemize"
39424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39434 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39461 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39470 arg "layout Description"
39478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39488 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39497 arg "depth-increment"
39505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39511 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39513 \begin_inset space ~
39517 \begin_inset space ~
39526 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39535 arg "depth-decrement"
39543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39549 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39551 \begin_inset space ~
39555 \begin_inset space ~
39564 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39573 arg "float-insert figure"
39581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39587 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39588 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39595 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39604 arg "float-insert table"
39612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39618 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39619 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39626 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39649 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39656 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39665 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39679 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39686 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39695 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39709 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39716 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39739 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39741 \begin_inset space ~
39750 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39759 arg "nomencl-insert"
39767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39773 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39775 \begin_inset space ~
39784 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39793 arg "footnote-insert"
39801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39807 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39814 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39823 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39837 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39839 \begin_inset space ~
39848 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39871 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39872 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39874 \begin_inset space ~
39883 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39892 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39906 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39913 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39936 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39943 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39966 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39968 \begin_inset space ~
39977 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39986 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40000 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40001 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
40008 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40017 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
40025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40031 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40032 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40034 \begin_inset space ~
40043 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40052 arg "dialog-show character"
40060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40066 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40068 \begin_inset space ~
40071 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
40078 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40087 arg "layout-paragraph"
40095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40101 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40103 \begin_inset space ~
40112 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40121 arg "thesaurus-entry"
40129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40135 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40149 \begin_layout Subsection
40150 View/Update Toolbar
40151 \begin_inset Index idx
40154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40155 Toolbar ! View / Update
40163 \begin_layout Standard
40164 \begin_inset Graphics
40165 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
40172 \begin_layout Standard
40173 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40179 \begin_layout Standard
40180 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40184 \begin_layout Standard
40185 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40191 \begin_layout Standard
40192 \begin_inset Tabular
40193 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
40194 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40195 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40196 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40197 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40220 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40227 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40236 arg "buffer-update"
40244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40250 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40257 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40266 arg "master-buffer-view"
40274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40280 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40282 \begin_inset space ~
40291 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40300 arg "master-buffer-update"
40308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40314 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40316 \begin_inset space ~
40320 \begin_inset space ~
40329 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40338 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40352 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40353 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40354 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40355 Synchronize with Output
40361 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40384 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40385 View (Other Formats)
40391 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40398 arg "update-others"
40406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40412 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40413 Update (Other Formats)
40426 \begin_layout Standard
40427 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40431 \begin_layout Subsection
40435 \begin_layout Standard
40436 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40437 \begin_inset space ~
40441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40443 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40447 , the table toolbar
40448 \begin_inset Index idx
40451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40460 \begin_inset space ~
40465 manual and the math macro toolbar
40466 \begin_inset Index idx
40469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40482 \begin_layout Chapter
40483 The Document Settings
40484 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40486 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40491 \begin_inset Index idx
40494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40495 Document ! Settings
40503 \begin_layout Standard
40507 \begin_inset space ~
40512 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40513 is called with the menu
40515 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40519 You can save your document settings as default with the
40521 Save as Document Defaults
40523 button in any dialog.
40524 This will create a template named
40528 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40529 when you create a new document without
40533 \begin_layout Standard
40538 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40539 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40542 \begin_layout Standard
40543 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40544 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40545 to find the one you are looking for.
40546 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40547 the submenus of the dialog.
40549 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40553 \begin_inset space \space{}
40557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40564 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40565 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40566 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40569 \begin_layout Section
40573 \begin_layout Standard
40574 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40576 Document classes are described in section
40577 \begin_inset space ~
40581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40583 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40591 \begin_layout Standard
40595 \begin_inset space ~
40600 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40605 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40606 as a layout for a document class.
40607 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40609 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40618 \begin_layout Standard
40619 Some classes use special class options by default.
40620 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40624 and you can decide to use them or not.
40625 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40626 recommended you leave them untouched.
40631 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40632 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40637 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40639 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40645 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40646 \begin_inset Newline newline
40651 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40654 \begin_inset Newline newline
40657 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40658 distribution, see section
40663 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40665 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40677 \begin_layout Standard
40682 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40683 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40684 in the background if the child document
40685 is opened without its master.
40686 This way child documents are always compilable.
40687 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40694 \begin_inset space ~
40702 \begin_layout Standard
40703 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40714 \begin_inset Index idx
40717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40719 -packages ! prettyref
40725 \begin_inset Index idx
40728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40730 -packages ! refstyle
40735 for cross-references, see section
40736 \begin_inset space ~
40740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40742 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40749 \begin_layout Section
40753 \begin_layout Standard
40754 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40755 Please refer to the section
40758 \begin_inset space ~
40766 \begin_inset space ~
40771 manual for details.
40774 \begin_layout Section
40778 \begin_layout Standard
40779 Modules are explained in section
40780 \begin_inset space ~
40784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40786 reference "subsec:Modules"
40793 \begin_layout Section
40797 \begin_layout Standard
40799 \begin_inset space ~
40803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40805 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40812 \begin_layout Section
40816 \begin_layout Standard
40817 The document font settings are described in section
40818 \begin_inset space ~
40822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40824 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40831 \begin_layout Section
40835 \begin_layout Standard
40836 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40848 \begin_inset space ~
40853 and whether it should be a
40856 \begin_inset space ~
40861 can also be specified here.
40864 \begin_layout Standard
40865 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40866 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40867 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40869 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40872 \begin_layout Standard
40875 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40878 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40879 justifies the text on screen.
40880 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40884 \begin_layout Section
40888 \begin_layout Standard
40889 This dialog is described in sections
40890 \begin_inset space ~
40894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40896 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40903 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40910 \begin_layout Section
40914 \begin_layout Standard
40915 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40916 \begin_inset space ~
40920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40922 reference "subsec:Margins"
40929 \begin_layout Section
40931 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40933 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40938 \begin_inset Index idx
40941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40942 Language ! Encoding
40950 \begin_layout Standard
40951 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40952 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40953 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40955 is always encoded in utf8).
40956 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40957 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40958 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40959 -command is not known for
40960 a particular character).
40963 \begin_layout Standard
40964 If you use the option
40969 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40970 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40971 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40973 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40974 exactly one encoding.
40975 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40978 \begin_layout Standard
40980 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40981 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40982 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40983 installation supports Unicode), choose
40984 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40985 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40986 is quite incomplete, so
40987 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40992 (when \SpecialChar LyX
40993 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40994 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
40995 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40996 -commands is not used, because all
40997 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40998 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40999 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41000 , two new alternative engines
41001 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
41003 Both engines support Unicode natively.
41005 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
41008 \begin_inset space ~
41016 \begin_inset space ~
41024 \begin_inset space ~
41030 \begin_inset space ~
41034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41036 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
41041 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
41045 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
41048 \begin_layout Standard
41052 \begin_inset space ~
41057 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41058 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
41060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41068 The possible settings are:
41071 \begin_layout Description
41072 Default uses the language package that is selected in
41074 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41075 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41079 \begin_inset space ~
41083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41085 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
41092 \begin_layout Description
41093 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
41094 format you will use.
41095 In many cases this will be
41100 \begin_inset Index idx
41103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41111 If the newer package
41116 \begin_inset Index idx
41119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41121 -packages ! polyglossia
41126 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41127 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41128 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
41130 this package will be used instead of
41137 \begin_layout Description
41139 \begin_inset space ~
41150 would be more appropriate.
41153 \begin_layout Description
41154 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
41155 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
41159 (for German texts), type in
41162 \begin_inset Newline newline
41167 usepackage{ngerman}
41170 \begin_layout Description
41171 None will not use a language package.
41172 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
41175 \begin_layout Standard
41176 Here is a list with the important encodings:
41179 \begin_layout Description
41181 \begin_inset space ~
41185 \begin_inset space ~
41189 \begin_inset space ~
41196 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41202 \begin_inset Index idx
41205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41207 -packages ! inputenc
41213 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
41214 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
41215 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
41219 \begin_layout Description
41220 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
41222 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
41223 commands, which may result in a big
41224 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
41225 -commands are needed.
41228 \begin_layout Description
41230 \begin_inset space ~
41234 \begin_inset space ~
41237 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
41240 \begin_layout Description
41242 \begin_inset space ~
41246 \begin_inset space ~
41249 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
41252 \begin_layout Description
41254 \begin_inset space ~
41257 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
41260 \begin_layout Description
41262 \begin_inset space ~
41266 \begin_inset space ~
41269 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
41270 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
41273 \begin_layout Description
41275 \begin_inset space ~
41279 \begin_inset space ~
41282 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
41286 \begin_layout Description
41288 \begin_inset space ~
41292 \begin_inset space ~
41295 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
41296 ISO-8859-13 encoding
41299 \begin_layout Description
41301 \begin_inset space ~
41305 \begin_inset space ~
41309 \begin_inset space ~
41312 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
41313 \begin_inset space ~
41319 \begin_layout Description
41321 \begin_inset space ~
41325 \begin_inset space ~
41329 \begin_inset space ~
41332 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41333 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41336 \begin_layout Description
41338 \begin_inset space ~
41342 \begin_inset space ~
41345 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41346 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41347 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41348 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41349 \begin_inset space ~
41353 \begin_inset space ~
41359 \begin_layout Description
41361 \begin_inset space ~
41365 \begin_inset space ~
41368 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41369 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41370 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41372 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41373 \begin_inset space ~
41377 \begin_inset space ~
41383 \begin_layout Description
41385 \begin_inset space ~
41389 \begin_inset space ~
41392 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41395 \begin_layout Description
41397 \begin_inset space ~
41401 \begin_inset space ~
41404 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41407 \begin_layout Description
41409 \begin_inset space ~
41413 \begin_inset space ~
41416 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41419 \begin_layout Description
41421 \begin_inset space ~
41424 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41427 \begin_layout Description
41429 \begin_inset space ~
41432 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41435 \begin_layout Description
41437 \begin_inset space ~
41441 \begin_inset space ~
41444 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41447 \begin_layout Description
41449 \begin_inset space ~
41453 \begin_inset space ~
41459 \begin_layout Description
41461 \begin_inset space ~
41465 \begin_inset space ~
41468 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41471 \begin_layout Description
41473 \begin_inset space ~
41477 \begin_inset space ~
41483 \begin_layout Description
41485 \begin_inset space ~
41489 \begin_inset space ~
41492 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41498 \begin_inset Index idx
41501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41508 , when using this, set the document language to
41513 \begin_layout Description
41515 \begin_inset space ~
41519 \begin_inset space ~
41522 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41527 , when using this, set the document language to
41530 \begin_inset space ~
41536 \begin_layout Description
41538 \begin_inset space ~
41542 \begin_inset space ~
41545 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41551 \begin_inset Index idx
41554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41556 -packages ! japanese
41561 , when using this, set the document language to
41566 \begin_layout Description
41568 \begin_inset space ~
41572 \begin_inset space ~
41575 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41580 , when using this, set the document language to
41585 \begin_layout Description
41587 \begin_inset space ~
41591 \begin_inset space ~
41594 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41599 , when using this, set the document language to
41604 \begin_layout Description
41606 \begin_inset space ~
41609 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41612 \begin_layout Description
41614 \begin_inset space ~
41618 \begin_inset space ~
41622 \begin_inset space ~
41625 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41628 \begin_layout Description
41630 \begin_inset space ~
41634 \begin_inset space ~
41638 \begin_inset space ~
41641 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41642 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41643 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41646 \begin_layout Description
41648 \begin_inset space ~
41652 \begin_inset space ~
41658 \begin_layout Description
41660 \begin_inset space ~
41664 \begin_inset space ~
41667 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41668 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41671 \begin_layout Description
41673 \begin_inset space ~
41677 \begin_inset space ~
41680 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41686 \begin_inset Index idx
41689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41696 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41699 \begin_layout Description
41701 \begin_inset space ~
41709 \begin_inset space ~
41712 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41719 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41722 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41729 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41730 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41732 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41735 \begin_layout Description
41737 \begin_inset space ~
41741 \begin_inset space ~
41744 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41750 \begin_inset Index idx
41753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41760 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41763 \begin_layout Description
41765 \begin_inset space ~
41768 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41774 \begin_inset Index idx
41777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41779 -packages ! inputenc
41785 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41789 \begin_layout Description
41791 \begin_inset space ~
41795 \begin_inset space ~
41799 \begin_inset space ~
41802 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41803 \begin_inset space ~
41809 \begin_layout Description
41811 \begin_inset space ~
41815 \begin_inset space ~
41819 \begin_inset space ~
41822 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41823 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41824 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41828 \begin_layout Description
41830 \begin_inset space ~
41834 \begin_inset space ~
41838 \begin_inset space ~
41841 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41842 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41845 \begin_layout Section
41847 \begin_inset Index idx
41850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41857 \begin_inset Index idx
41860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41867 \begin_inset Index idx
41870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41871 Color ! Shaded boxes
41877 \begin_inset Index idx
41880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41881 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41889 \begin_layout Standard
41890 Here you can alter the font color for the
41894 (default: black), for
41897 \begin_inset space ~
41902 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41906 (default: white) and for
41909 \begin_inset space ~
41919 sets the color back to the default.
41922 \begin_layout Standard
41923 Clicking any button showing
41931 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41932 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41933 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41934 later more quickly.
41937 \begin_layout Standard
41938 Note, if you change the
41941 \begin_inset space ~
41946 font color and use the option
41949 \begin_inset space ~
41954 in the document settings under
41957 \begin_inset space ~
41962 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41963 \begin_inset space ~
41967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41969 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41976 \begin_layout Standard
41977 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41983 \begin_layout Standard
41987 \begin_inset space ~
41996 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41999 \begin_inset space ~
42002 Code after a forced page break:
42005 \begin_layout Itemize
42006 For the page color:
42007 \begin_inset Newline newline
42014 pagecolor{color name}
42017 \begin_layout Itemize
42018 For the text color:
42019 \begin_inset Newline newline
42029 \begin_layout Standard
42030 You are restricted to one of
42066 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
42073 \begin_inset space ~
42079 \begin_inset Newline newline
42082 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
42083 names to refer to them:
42086 \begin_layout Itemize
42092 \begin_inset Newline newline
42097 page_backgroundcolor
42100 \begin_layout Itemize
42104 \begin_inset space ~
42110 \begin_inset Newline newline
42118 \begin_layout Itemize
42122 \begin_inset space ~
42128 \begin_inset Newline newline
42136 \begin_layout Itemize
42140 \begin_inset space ~
42146 \begin_inset Newline newline
42154 \begin_layout Standard
42155 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
42158 \begin_inset space ~
42166 \begin_inset space ~
42174 \begin_layout Section
42178 \begin_layout Standard
42179 Here you can adjust the
42183 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
42187 as described in section
42188 \begin_inset space ~
42192 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42194 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
42201 \begin_layout Section
42205 \begin_layout Standard
42206 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42212 \begin_inset Index idx
42215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42227 \begin_inset Index idx
42230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42232 -packages ! jurabib
42240 Sectioned bibliography
42242 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42248 \begin_inset Index idx
42251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42253 -packages ! bibtopic
42258 and you can select a
42262 for the generation of the bibliography.
42263 For a further description see section
42264 \begin_inset space ~
42268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42270 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42277 \begin_layout Section
42281 \begin_layout Standard
42282 Here you can define the
42286 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
42288 \begin_inset space ~
42292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42294 reference "sec:Index"
42301 \begin_layout Section
42305 \begin_layout Standard
42306 The PDF properties are explained in section
42307 \begin_inset space ~
42311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42313 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42320 \begin_layout Section
42324 \begin_layout Standard
42325 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
42326 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42332 \begin_inset Index idx
42335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42337 -packages ! amsmath
42347 \begin_inset Index idx
42350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42352 -packages ! amssymb
42362 \begin_inset Index idx
42365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42377 \begin_inset Index idx
42380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42392 \begin_inset Index idx
42395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42397 -packages ! mathdots
42407 \begin_inset Index idx
42410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42412 -packages ! mathtools
42422 \begin_inset Index idx
42425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42437 \begin_inset Index idx
42440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42442 -packages ! stackrel
42452 \begin_inset Index idx
42455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42457 -packages ! stmaryrd
42467 \begin_inset Index idx
42470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42472 -packages ! undertilde
42477 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42480 \begin_layout Description
42481 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42482 -errors in formulas,
42483 ensure that you have this enabled.
42486 \begin_layout Description
42487 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42488 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42489 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42493 \begin_layout Description
42494 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42497 \begin_inset space ~
42509 \begin_layout Description
42510 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42513 \begin_inset space ~
42525 \begin_layout Description
42526 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42537 \begin_layout Description
42538 mathtools is used for the math commands
42574 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42581 \begin_layout Description
42582 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42584 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42593 \begin_layout Description
42594 stackrel is used for the math command
42611 \begin_layout Description
42612 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42615 \begin_layout Description
42616 undertilde is used for the math command
42624 Accents for one Character
42633 \begin_layout Section
42637 \begin_layout Standard
42638 The float placement options are described in the section
42641 \begin_inset space ~
42649 \begin_inset space ~
42657 \begin_layout Section
42661 \begin_layout Standard
42662 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42664 Program Code Listings
42669 \begin_inset space ~
42677 \begin_layout Section
42681 \begin_layout Standard
42682 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42690 set to be used and set the
42695 The itemize environment is described in section
42696 \begin_inset space ~
42700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42702 reference "sec:Itemize"
42709 \begin_layout Standard
42710 You can furthermore specify a
42713 \begin_inset space ~
42718 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42719 command of the desired character.
42720 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42727 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42729 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42733 \begin_inset space \space{}
42737 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42747 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42748 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42751 \begin_layout Standard
42752 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42760 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42761 -packages in the preamble (menu
42764 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42765 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42768 \begin_inset space ~
42774 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42778 usepackage{textcomp}
42781 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42785 usepackage{amssymb}
42795 \begin_layout Section
42799 \begin_layout Standard
42800 Branches are described in section
42801 \begin_inset space ~
42805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42807 reference "sec:Branches"
42814 \begin_layout Section
42816 \change_deleted 2047637253 1472399758
42818 \change_inserted 2047637253 1472400015
42822 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42824 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
42831 \begin_layout Standard
42832 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42835 \begin_layout Description
42837 \begin_inset space ~
42841 \begin_inset space ~
42844 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42864 View Master Document
42865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42872 Update Master Document
42873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42880 menu or the toolbar.
42881 The default is set in
42883 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42884 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42886 \begin_inset space ~
42889 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42893 \begin_inset space ~
42897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42899 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42906 \begin_layout Description
42908 \begin_inset space ~
42912 \begin_inset space ~
42915 Output settings for the menu
42917 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42919 \begin_inset space ~
42925 For a detailed description see section
42927 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42932 \begin_inset space ~
42940 \begin_layout Description
42942 \begin_inset space ~
42946 \begin_inset space ~
42949 Options offers settings for the export format
42957 \begin_inset space ~
42962 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42963 \begin_inset space ~
42966 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42970 \begin_inset space ~
42975 settings are described in detail in section
42977 Math Output in XHTML
42982 \begin_inset space ~
42991 \begin_inset space ~
42995 \begin_inset space ~
43000 is used for the size of equations in the output.
43003 \begin_layout Description
43005 \begin_inset space ~
43010 Save transient properties
43012 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
43013 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
43014 The properties that are affected by option are currently
43015 \change_inserted 2047637253 1472400492
43022 \begin_layout Itemize
43023 the activation of change tracking
43024 \change_inserted 2047637253 1472400062
43030 \begin_layout Itemize
43031 the output of tracked changes
43032 \change_inserted 2047637253 1472400062
43038 \begin_layout Itemize
43039 the recording of the document directory path.
43042 \begin_layout Standard
43043 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
43044 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
43048 \begin_layout Section
43056 \begin_layout Standard
43057 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
43059 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
43061 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43063 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
43067 \begin_layout Standard
43068 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43069 -syntax is given in section
43070 \begin_inset space ~
43074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43076 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
43083 \begin_layout Chapter
43089 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43091 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43096 \begin_inset Index idx
43099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43108 \begin_layout Standard
43109 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
43111 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43115 It has the following submenus.
43118 \begin_layout Section
43122 \begin_layout Subsection
43126 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43127 User Interface File
43128 \begin_inset Index idx
43131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43132 Customization ! of toolbars
43138 \begin_inset Index idx
43141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43142 Customization ! of menus
43150 \begin_layout Standard
43151 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
43152 interface (ui) file.
43153 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
43161 \begin_layout Description
43166 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
43169 \begin_layout Description
43176 the menu entries in popup context menus
43179 \begin_layout Description
43184 specifies the toolbar buttons
43187 \begin_layout Standard
43188 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
43189 and edit the entries.
43192 \begin_layout Standard
43193 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
43205 entries must be finished with an explicit
43230 and in the case of the
43231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43243 The syntax for the entries is:
43246 \begin_layout Standard
43247 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43276 \begin_layout Standard
43278 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43281 All the \SpecialChar LyX
43282 -functions are listed in the menu
43284 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
43286 \begin_inset space ~
43294 \begin_layout Standard
43295 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
43301 \begin_layout Standard
43302 For example, assuming you use the menu
43304 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43307 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
43311 \begin_layout Standard
43312 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43336 \begin_layout Standard
43338 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43353 to have the sixth bookmark.
43356 \begin_layout Standard
43360 \begin_inset space ~
43365 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
43366 's toolbar buttons.
43367 The currently available icon sets are compared in
43368 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43371 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43378 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43382 \begin_layout Standard
43385 Enable tool tips in main work area
43387 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43391 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43395 \begin_layout Standard
43400 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43401 should display in the menu
43403 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43405 \begin_inset space ~
43413 \begin_layout Subsection
43417 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43421 \begin_layout Standard
43424 Restore window layouts and geometries
43427 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43428 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43432 \begin_layout Standard
43435 Restore cursor positions
43437 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43441 \begin_layout Standard
43444 Load opened files from last session
43446 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43450 \begin_layout Standard
43453 Clear all session information
43455 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43456 sessions (cursor positions, names
43457 of last opened documents, etc.).
43460 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43462 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43464 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43469 \begin_inset Index idx
43472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43481 \begin_layout Standard
43484 Backup original documents when saving
43486 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43487 it was saved the last time.
43488 It is stored in the
43491 \begin_inset space ~
43497 \begin_inset space ~
43501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43503 reference "sec:Paths"
43507 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43510 \begin_inset space ~
43516 The backup file has the file extension
43517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43531 \begin_layout Standard
43534 Backup documents, every
43536 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43539 \begin_layout Standard
43542 Save documents compressed by default
43544 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
43545 \begin_inset space ~
43549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43551 reference "subsec:Compressed"
43556 This applies to newly created documents only.
43557 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
43560 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43561 Windows & work area
43564 \begin_layout Standard
43567 Open documents in tabs
43569 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43573 \begin_layout Standard
43578 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43585 \begin_inset space ~
43589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43591 reference "sec:Paths"
43595 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43602 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43603 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43604 of \SpecialChar LyX
43606 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43607 instance is created for each file.
43610 \begin_layout Standard
43613 Single close-tab button
43615 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43625 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43626 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43628 \change_inserted 274215730 1469338548
43629 Regardless of this option, one may always close a tab by middle-clicking
43635 \begin_layout Standard
43636 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43644 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43645 before the change takes effect.
43653 \begin_layout Standard
43658 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43660 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43662 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43666 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43667 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43668 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43671 \begin_layout Subsection
43673 \begin_inset Index idx
43676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43685 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43692 \begin_layout Standard
43693 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43697 \begin_layout Standard
43698 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43706 This section only deals with the fonts
43710 the \SpecialChar LyX
43712 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43715 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43716 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43727 \begin_layout Standard
43728 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43745 (depends on the system) as its
43748 \begin_inset space ~
43764 \begin_layout Standard
43765 You can change the font size with the
43772 \begin_layout Standard
43777 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43779 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43782 points have the size of 1
43783 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43787 \begin_inset space ~
43791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43793 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43798 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43799 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43803 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43804 \begin_inset space ~
43808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43810 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43817 \begin_layout Standard
43820 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43822 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43823 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43824 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43825 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43826 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43828 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43829 \begin_inset space ~
43835 \begin_layout Subsection
43837 \begin_inset Index idx
43840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43841 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43848 \begin_inset Index idx
43851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43860 \begin_layout Standard
43861 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43862 by choosing an item in the
43863 list and selecting the
43870 \begin_layout Standard
43871 By checking the option
43875 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43878 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43879 \begin_inset space ~
43883 \begin_inset space ~
43888 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43891 \begin_layout Subsection
43893 \begin_inset Index idx
43896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43905 \begin_layout Standard
43906 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43910 \begin_layout Standard
43915 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43916 This feature is described in section
43917 \begin_inset space ~
43921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43923 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43930 \begin_layout Standard
43931 Checking the option
43934 \begin_inset space ~
43938 \begin_inset space ~
43942 \begin_inset space ~
43947 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43950 \begin_layout Section
43952 \begin_inset Index idx
43955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43964 \begin_layout Subsection
43968 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43972 \begin_layout Standard
43975 Cursor follows scrollbar
43977 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43981 \begin_layout Standard
43982 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43983 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43984 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43987 \begin_layout Standard
43990 Scroll below end of document
43992 is self-explanatory.
43995 \begin_layout Standard
43996 In \SpecialChar LyX
43997 one can jump from word to word by pressing
44004 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
44006 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
44007 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
44010 \begin_layout Standard
44013 Sort environments alphabetically
44015 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
44018 \begin_layout Standard
44021 Group environments by their category
44023 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
44026 \begin_layout Standard
44031 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
44042 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44046 \begin_layout Standard
44047 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
44052 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
44053 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
44057 \begin_layout Subsection
44059 \begin_inset Index idx
44062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44069 \begin_inset Index idx
44072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44073 Settings ! Shortcuts
44081 \begin_layout Standard
44086 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
44088 Several binding files are available, among them:
44091 \begin_layout Description
44092 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
44095 \begin_layout Description
44096 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
44108 \begin_layout Description
44109 mac.bind a set of bindings for
44112 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44120 \begin_layout Standard
44121 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
44126 , and binding files for special languages.
44127 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
44128 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44132 \begin_inset space \space{}
44136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44144 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
44145 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
44146 will try to use the appropriate binding
44150 \begin_layout Standard
44151 Some binding files, like
44155 , only have a limited scope.
44156 When looking at the end of the file
44160 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
44163 \begin_layout Standard
44167 \begin_inset space ~
44171 \begin_inset space ~
44176 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
44177 in the selected key binding file.
44180 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44182 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44184 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
44189 \begin_inset Index idx
44192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44193 Key Bindings ! Editing
44201 \begin_layout Standard
44202 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
44203 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
44204 functions and the bound shortcuts.
44205 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
44208 Show key-bindings containing
44211 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
44212 Insert there for example as keyword
44213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44220 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
44221 functions that contain
44222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44230 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
44231 All \SpecialChar LyX
44232 functions are also listed in the file
44237 that you will find in the
44244 \begin_layout Standard
44245 For example, to add the shortcut
44253 , select the function and press the
44258 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
44259 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
44262 \begin_layout Standard
44263 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
44264 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
44266 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
44267 function names as a semicolon separated list.
44269 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
44274 \begin_layout Standard
44275 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
44278 \begin_layout Standard
44279 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
44281 The syntax of the entries is:
44284 \begin_layout Standard
44290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44309 \begin_layout Subsection
44311 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44313 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
44318 \begin_inset Index idx
44321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44328 \begin_inset Index idx
44331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44332 Settings ! Keyboard Map
44340 \begin_layout Standard
44341 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
44342 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
44343 provides keyboard maps.
44344 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
44345 is a Romanian one, you can enable
44348 \begin_inset space ~
44352 \begin_inset space ~
44357 and select the keyboard map file named
44364 \begin_layout Standard
44373 keyboard map and, if you use the
44377 bindings, you can select the first and second with
44380 arg "keymap-primary"
44386 arg "keymap-secondary"
44389 respectively or toggle between them with
44392 arg "keymap-toggle"
44398 \begin_layout Standard
44399 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44407 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44416 \begin_layout Standard
44417 You can also specify the mouse
44419 Wheel scrolling speed
44422 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44426 Middle mouse button pasting
44428 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
44429 inserts the content of the clipboard.
44432 \begin_layout Standard
44440 \begin_inset space ~
44444 \begin_inset space ~
44449 you can select a key for zooming.
44450 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44453 \begin_layout Subsection
44457 \begin_layout Standard
44458 Input completion is described in section
44459 \begin_inset space ~
44463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44465 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44472 \begin_layout Section
44474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44481 \begin_inset Index idx
44484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44491 \begin_inset Index idx
44494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44503 \begin_layout Standard
44504 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44505 are normally determined during
44507 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44510 \begin_layout Description
44512 \begin_inset space ~
44515 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44516 's working directory.
44517 It is the default when you
44528 \begin_inset space ~
44536 \begin_layout Description
44538 \begin_inset space ~
44541 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44543 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44545 \begin_inset space ~
44549 \begin_inset space ~
44557 \begin_layout Description
44559 \begin_inset space ~
44562 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44568 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44572 \begin_inset Newline newline
44576 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44588 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44589 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44597 \begin_layout Description
44599 \begin_inset space ~
44603 \begin_inset Index idx
44606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44612 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44613 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44614 \begin_inset space ~
44618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44620 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44628 will be used to save the backups.
44629 \begin_inset Newline newline
44632 Backup files have the ending
44633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44643 \begin_layout Description
44645 \begin_inset space ~
44648 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44649 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44651 \begin_inset Newline newline
44658 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44664 You can edit this file with the program
44673 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44674 in its preferences under
44677 \begin_inset space ~
44683 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44688 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44690 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44691 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44697 and \SpecialChar LyX
44698 need to be running the same time.
44699 \begin_inset Newline newline
44702 The pipe is also used for the
44706 feature, see section
44707 \begin_inset space ~
44711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44713 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44718 \begin_inset Newline newline
44721 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44722 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44723 \begin_inset Newline newline
44739 \begin_layout Description
44741 \begin_inset space ~
44744 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44747 \begin_layout Description
44749 \begin_inset space ~
44752 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44753 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44754 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44757 \begin_layout Description
44759 \begin_inset space ~
44762 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44768 You only need to specify it if you are using
44772 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44774 For \SpecialChar LyX
44779 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44783 \begin_layout Description
44785 \begin_inset space ~
44788 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44789 When \SpecialChar LyX
44790 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44791 to find it on the system.
44792 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44794 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44796 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44800 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44803 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44804 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44807 \begin_layout Description
44809 \begin_inset space ~
44812 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44813 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44814 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44815 code or in the document
44817 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44819 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44820 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44821 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44822 scanned for the input files.
44823 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44824 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44826 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44827 compilation may fail for some documents.
44830 \begin_layout Section
44834 \begin_layout Standard
44835 Here you can insert your
44844 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44846 \begin_inset space ~
44850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44852 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44856 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44859 \begin_layout Section
44861 \begin_inset Index idx
44864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44865 Language ! Settings
44871 \begin_inset Index idx
44874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44875 Settings ! Language
44883 \begin_layout Subsection
44885 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44887 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44894 \begin_layout Description
44896 \begin_inset space ~
44900 \begin_inset space ~
44903 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44905 You can find its actual translation status here:
44906 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44908 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44915 \begin_layout Description
44917 \begin_inset space ~
44920 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44921 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44922 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44923 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44940 The most widespread language package is
44945 \begin_inset Index idx
44948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44955 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44957 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44958 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44959 come with the alternative
44965 \begin_inset Index idx
44968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44970 -packages ! polyglossia
44975 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44976 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44982 The available selections are described in section
44983 \begin_inset space ~
44987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44989 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44996 \begin_layout Description
44998 \begin_inset space ~
45001 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45002 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
45003 you can here specify the command to start the package.
45004 An example is the start command
45010 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
45012 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
45016 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45031 selectlanguage{$$lang}
45036 \begin_layout Description
45038 \begin_inset space ~
45046 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
45047 command toggles the package on and off.
45050 \begin_layout Description
45052 \begin_inset space ~
45056 \begin_inset space ~
45059 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
45063 \begin_layout Description
45065 \begin_inset space ~
45069 \begin_inset space ~
45072 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
45076 \begin_layout Description
45078 \begin_inset space ~
45082 \begin_inset space ~
45085 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
45086 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
45087 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
45089 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
45096 \begin_layout Description
45098 \begin_inset space ~
45101 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
45103 When this option is not set, the
45106 \begin_inset space ~
45111 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45113 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
45116 \begin_inset space ~
45124 \begin_layout Description
45126 \begin_inset space ~
45132 \begin_inset space ~
45138 When it is not set, the
45141 \begin_inset space ~
45146 is set to the end of the document.
45149 \begin_layout Description
45151 \begin_inset space ~
45155 \begin_inset space ~
45158 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
45159 language will be underlined in blue.
45162 \begin_layout Description
45164 \begin_inset space ~
45168 \begin_inset space ~
45171 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
45172 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
45175 \begin_layout Description
45177 \begin_inset space ~
45180 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
45181 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
45182 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
45183 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
45186 \begin_layout Subsection
45190 \begin_layout Standard
45191 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
45192 \begin_inset space ~
45196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45198 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
45205 \begin_layout Section
45209 \begin_layout Subsection
45211 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45213 name "subsec:General-output"
45220 \begin_layout Description
45222 \begin_inset space ~
45225 search Commands that will be used for the menu
45227 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45229 \begin_inset space ~
45235 For a detailed description see section
45237 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45242 \begin_inset space ~
45250 \begin_layout Description
45252 \begin_inset space ~
45255 Options Options for the program
45259 that is used for the export format
45264 \begin_inset space ~
45268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45270 reference "subsec:Export"
45275 Possible options are listed in the
45280 \begin_inset Newline newline
45284 \begin_inset Flex URL
45287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45289 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
45299 \begin_layout Description
45301 \begin_inset space ~
45305 \begin_inset space ~
45308 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
45311 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45312 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
45314 \begin_inset space ~
45320 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
45323 \begin_layout Description
45325 \begin_inset space ~
45329 \begin_inset Index idx
45332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45339 \begin_inset Index idx
45342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45343 Settings ! Date format
45348 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
45349 \begin_inset Newline newline
45353 \begin_inset Flex URL
45356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45358 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
45364 \begin_inset Newline newline
45367 For example the format
45368 \begin_inset Newline newline
45372 \begin_inset Newline newline
45375 prints the date as day/month/year.
45378 \begin_layout Description
45380 \begin_inset space ~
45384 \begin_inset space ~
45387 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
45388 is allowed to overwrite on export.
45391 \begin_layout Subsection
45397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45399 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
45404 \begin_inset Index idx
45407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45408 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
45417 \begin_layout Description
45419 \begin_inset space ~
45427 \begin_inset space ~
45431 \begin_inset space ~
45434 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45439 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45460 are used for Cyrillic.
45461 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45474 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45476 sets up in the background.
45477 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45480 \begin_layout Description
45482 \begin_inset space ~
45486 \begin_inset space ~
45490 \begin_inset space ~
45494 \begin_inset space ~
45497 options They only have an effect when the program
45501 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45504 \begin_layout Standard
45505 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45506 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45507 manuals of the applications.
45510 \begin_layout Description
45512 \begin_inset space ~
45515 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45516 \begin_inset space ~
45520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45522 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45529 \begin_layout Description
45531 \begin_inset space ~
45534 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45535 \begin_inset space ~
45539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45541 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45548 \begin_layout Description
45550 \begin_inset space ~
45553 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45554 \begin_inset space ~
45558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45560 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45567 \begin_layout Description
45573 \begin_inset space ~
45576 command Command for the program
45578 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45581 that is described in the section
45583 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45588 Additional Features
45593 \begin_layout Standard
45594 There are additionally the following options:
45597 \begin_layout Description
45599 \begin_inset space ~
45603 \begin_inset space ~
45607 \begin_inset space ~
45611 \begin_inset space ~
45616 \begin_inset space ~
45619 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45637 to separate folders.
45638 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45640 \begin_inset Index idx
45643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45650 \begin_inset Index idx
45653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45662 \begin_layout Description
45664 \begin_inset space ~
45668 \begin_inset space ~
45672 \begin_inset space ~
45676 \begin_inset space ~
45680 \begin_inset space ~
45684 \begin_inset space ~
45687 changes Removes all manually set
45693 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45694 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45696 \begin_inset space ~
45701 dialog when changing the document class.
45704 \begin_layout Section
45706 \begin_inset space ~
45710 \begin_inset Index idx
45713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45722 \begin_layout Subsection
45724 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45726 name "subsec:Converters"
45731 \begin_inset Index idx
45734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45743 \begin_layout Standard
45744 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45745 from one format to another.
45746 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45747 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45754 \begin_inset space ~
45759 field and press the
45764 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45768 \begin_inset space ~
45773 drop-down list, modify the
45777 field and press the
45784 \begin_layout Standard
45787 Converter File Cache
45793 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45795 Maximum Age (in days
45798 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45799 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45802 \begin_layout Standard
45803 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45804 definition, is described in the section
45815 \begin_layout Subsection
45817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45819 name "sec:File-Formats"
45824 \begin_inset Index idx
45827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45834 \begin_inset Index idx
45837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45846 \begin_layout Standard
45847 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45857 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45860 \begin_layout Standard
45861 You can also define the
45863 Default output format
45865 that is used when you use
45867 View, Update, View Master Document
45871 Update Master Document
45877 menu or the toolbar.
45880 \begin_layout Standard
45881 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45892 \begin_layout Standard
45893 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45895 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45896 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45897 This is done by specifying a
45902 More about this is described in the section
45913 \begin_layout Chapter
45914 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45916 \begin_inset Index idx
45919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45926 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45928 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45935 \begin_layout Standard
45937 \begin_inset space ~
45941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45943 reference "tab:Units"
45947 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45948 and used in this documentation.
45951 \begin_layout Standard
45952 \begin_inset Float table
45958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45959 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45962 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45977 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45985 \begin_inset Tabular
45986 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
45987 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45988 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45989 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45990 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46123 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46127 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46164 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46196 scaled point (65536
46197 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46201 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46234 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46238 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46271 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46275 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
46279 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46312 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46316 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46348 % of original image width
46353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46630 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46634 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46664 \begin_layout Chapter
46666 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46668 name "chap:Credits"
46675 \begin_layout Standard
46676 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46677 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46680 \begin_layout Itemize
46683 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46686 \begin_layout Itemize
46692 \begin_layout Itemize
46698 \begin_layout Itemize
46704 \begin_layout Itemize
46710 \begin_layout Itemize
46716 \begin_layout Itemize
46722 \begin_layout Itemize
46728 \begin_layout Itemize
46731 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46734 \begin_layout Itemize
46740 \begin_layout Itemize
46746 \begin_layout Itemize
46752 \begin_layout Itemize
46758 \begin_layout Itemize
46764 \begin_layout Itemize
46770 \begin_layout Itemize
46776 \begin_layout Itemize
46782 \begin_layout Itemize
46783 The \SpecialChar LyX
46785 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46794 \begin_layout Standard
46795 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46798 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46805 \begin_layout Bibliography
46806 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46807 LatexCommand bibitem
46813 The \SpecialChar LyX
46815 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46818 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46823 \begin_inset Newline newline
46827 \begin_inset Flex URL
46830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46832 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46840 \begin_layout Bibliography
46841 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46842 LatexCommand bibitem
46843 key "latexcompanion"
46847 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46849 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46850 Companion Second Edition.
46853 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46856 \begin_layout Bibliography
46857 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46858 LatexCommand bibitem
46863 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46866 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46870 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46873 \begin_layout Bibliography
46874 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46875 LatexCommand bibitem
46883 : A Document Preparation System.
46886 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46889 \begin_layout Bibliography
46890 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46891 LatexCommand bibitem
46900 The \SpecialChar TeX
46904 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46907 \begin_layout Bibliography
46908 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46909 LatexCommand bibitem
46914 The \SpecialChar TeX
46916 \begin_inset Newline newline
46920 \begin_inset Flex URL
46923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46925 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46933 \begin_layout Bibliography
46934 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46935 LatexCommand bibitem
46940 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46942 \begin_inset Newline newline
46946 \begin_inset Flex URL
46949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46951 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
46959 \begin_layout Bibliography
46960 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46961 LatexCommand bibitem
46967 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46969 name "Documentation"
46970 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46976 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46980 \begin_inset Newline newline
46984 \begin_inset Flex URL
46987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46989 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46997 \begin_layout Bibliography
46998 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46999 LatexCommand bibitem
47005 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47007 name "Documentation"
47008 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
47012 how to use the program
47014 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47018 \begin_inset Newline newline
47022 \begin_inset Flex URL
47025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47027 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
47035 \begin_layout Bibliography
47036 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47037 LatexCommand bibitem
47043 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47045 name "Documentation"
47046 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
47055 \begin_inset Newline newline
47059 \begin_inset Flex URL
47062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47064 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
47072 \begin_layout Bibliography
47073 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47074 LatexCommand bibitem
47075 key "makeindex-man"
47080 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47083 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
47092 \begin_inset Newline newline
47096 \begin_inset Flex URL
47099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47101 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
47109 \begin_layout Bibliography
47110 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47111 LatexCommand bibitem
47117 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47119 name "Documentation"
47120 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
47129 \begin_inset Newline newline
47133 \begin_inset Flex URL
47136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47138 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
47146 \begin_layout Bibliography
47147 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47148 LatexCommand bibitem
47154 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47156 name "Documentation"
47157 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
47161 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
47163 \begin_inset Newline newline
47167 \begin_inset Flex URL
47170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47172 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
47180 \begin_layout Bibliography
47181 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47182 LatexCommand bibitem
47188 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47190 name "Documentation"
47191 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
47195 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47201 \begin_inset Index idx
47204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47206 -packages ! caption
47212 \begin_inset Newline newline
47216 \begin_inset Flex URL
47219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47221 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
47229 \begin_layout Bibliography
47230 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47231 LatexCommand bibitem
47237 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47239 name "Documentation"
47240 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
47244 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47250 \begin_inset Index idx
47253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47255 -packages ! enumitem
47261 \begin_inset Newline newline
47265 \begin_inset Flex URL
47268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47270 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
47278 \begin_layout Bibliography
47279 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47280 LatexCommand bibitem
47286 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47288 name "Documentation"
47289 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
47293 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47299 \begin_inset Index idx
47302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47304 -packages ! fancyhdr
47310 \begin_inset Newline newline
47314 \begin_inset Flex URL
47317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47319 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
47327 \begin_layout Bibliography
47328 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47329 LatexCommand bibitem
47335 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47337 name "Documentation"
47338 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
47342 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47348 \begin_inset Index idx
47351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47353 -packages ! hyperref
47359 \begin_inset Newline newline
47363 \begin_inset Flex URL
47366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47368 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
47376 \begin_layout Bibliography
47377 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47378 LatexCommand bibitem
47384 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47386 name "Documentation"
47387 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
47391 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47397 \begin_inset Index idx
47400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47402 -packages ! nomencl
47408 \begin_inset Newline newline
47412 \begin_inset Flex URL
47415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47417 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47425 \begin_layout Bibliography
47426 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47427 LatexCommand bibitem
47433 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47435 name "Documentation"
47436 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47440 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47446 \begin_inset Index idx
47449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47451 -packages ! prettyref
47457 \begin_inset Newline newline
47461 \begin_inset Flex URL
47464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47466 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47474 \begin_layout Bibliography
47475 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47476 LatexCommand bibitem
47482 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47484 name "Documentation"
47485 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47489 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47495 \begin_inset Index idx
47498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47500 -packages ! refstyle
47506 \begin_inset Newline newline
47510 \begin_inset Flex URL
47513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47515 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47523 \begin_layout Bibliography
47524 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47525 LatexCommand bibitem
47531 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47534 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47538 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47540 \begin_inset Newline newline
47544 \begin_inset Flex URL
47547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47549 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47557 \begin_layout Bibliography
47558 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47559 LatexCommand bibitem
47565 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47568 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47572 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47574 \begin_inset Newline newline
47578 \begin_inset Flex URL
47581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47583 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47591 \begin_layout Bibliography
47592 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47593 LatexCommand bibitem
47599 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47602 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47606 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47607 for Cyrillic languages:
47608 \begin_inset Newline newline
47612 \begin_inset Flex URL
47615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47617 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47625 \begin_layout Bibliography
47626 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47627 LatexCommand bibitem
47633 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47636 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47640 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47642 \begin_inset Newline newline
47646 \begin_inset Flex URL
47649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47651 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47659 \begin_layout Bibliography
47660 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47661 LatexCommand bibitem
47667 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47670 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47674 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47676 \begin_inset Newline newline
47680 \begin_inset Flex URL
47683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47685 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47693 \begin_layout Bibliography
47694 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47695 LatexCommand bibitem
47701 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47704 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47708 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47710 \begin_inset Newline newline
47714 \begin_inset Flex URL
47717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47719 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47727 \begin_layout Bibliography
47728 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47729 LatexCommand bibitem
47735 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47738 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47742 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47744 \begin_inset Newline newline
47748 \begin_inset Flex URL
47751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47753 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47761 \begin_layout Bibliography
47762 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47763 LatexCommand bibitem
47769 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47772 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47776 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47778 \begin_inset Newline newline
47782 \begin_inset Flex URL
47785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47787 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47795 \begin_layout Bibliography
47796 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47797 LatexCommand bibitem
47803 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47806 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47810 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47812 \begin_inset Newline newline
47816 \begin_inset Flex URL
47819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47821 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47829 \begin_layout Bibliography
47830 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47831 LatexCommand bibitem
47837 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47840 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47844 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47846 \begin_inset Newline newline
47850 \begin_inset Flex URL
47853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47855 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47863 \begin_layout Bibliography
47864 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47865 LatexCommand bibitem
47871 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47874 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47878 about new features in
47884 \begin_inset Newline newline
47888 \begin_inset Flex URL
47891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47893 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47901 \begin_layout Standard
47902 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47936 \begin_inset Note Note
47939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47946 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47947 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47948 bibliography is the second one:
47956 \begin_layout Standard
47957 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47958 LatexCommand bibtex
47959 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47960 options "biblio/alphadin"
47967 \begin_layout Standard
47968 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47972 \begin_layout Standard
47973 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47974 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47980 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47981 LatexCommand printindex